Home

2011 Sorento Owner`s Manual

1. XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ob Features of your vehicle Using iPod 1 iPod Selection Button If iPod is connected it switches to the iPod mode from the previous mode to play the song files stored in the iPod If there is no iPod connected then it dis plays the message No Media for 3 sec onds and returns to the previous mode 2 TRACK Selection Button e Press the TRACK V button for less than 0 8 seconds to play from the beginning of the song currently played Press the button for less than 0 8 sec onds and press it again within 1 sec ond to move to and play the previous track Press the button for 0 8 seconds or longer to play the song in reverse direction in fast speed Press the TRACK A button for less than 0 8 seconds to move to the next track Press the button for 0 8 seconds or longer to play the song in forward direc tion in fast speed 3 REPEAT Button Repeats the song currently played 4 RANDOM Playback Button e Press this button for less than 0 8 sec onds to shuffle order of all songs in current category Song Random e Press this button for 0 8 seconds or longer to shuffle order of albums in cur rent category Album Random e To cancel RANDOM Play press this button again 5 INFO Button Displays the information of the file cur rently played in the order of TITLE ARTIST ALBUM NORMAL DISPLAY TITLE Displays no information if
2. OXM049110 D190400AUN C1 Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position To operate the lights turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the fol lowing positions 1 OFF position Parking light position Headlight position 2 3 4 Auto light position if equipped So am Seis XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 42 AM Page 64 P OXM049250N D190401AHM Parking light position 2004 When the light switch is in the parking light position 1st position the tail license and instrument panel lights will turn ON OXM049251N D190402AHM Headlight position 20 When the light switch is in the headlight position 2nd position the head tail license and instrument panel lights will turn ON x NOTICE The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights OXM049128N Auto light position if equipped When the light switch is in the AUTO light position the taillights and headlights will turn ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehi cle XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 42 AM Page 65 P Features of your vehicle CAUTION Never place anything over the sensor 1 located on the instru ment panel This will ensure bet ter auto light system control Don t clean the sensor using a window cleaner The cleaner
3. ks POWER r 3 a SCAN MUTE VOLUME 5 CAT FOLDER AUX INFO SETUP ENTER a ij 1 FM AM Selection Button 2 Power ON OFF Button and Volume Control Knob 3 Automatic Station Seek Button 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 MUTE Button b 6 Preset Selection Buttons 7 TUNE amp AUDIO Control Knob 8 SETUP Button XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ab Features of your vehicle Using RADIO SETUP VOLUME and AUDIO CONTROL 1 FM AM Selection Button The FM AM button toggles between FM and AM Listed below are the paths as the system switches from FM to AM and back to FM e FM AM FM1 FM2AM FM1 e FM FM1s FM2 lt FM1 2 Power ON OFF Button amp Volume Control Knob e Turns the audio system on off when the ignition switch is on ACC or ON f the knob is turned clockwise counter clockwise the volume will increase decrease 3 Automatic Station Seek Button e When the SEEK V is pressed it will automatically tune to the next lower station When the SEEK A is pressed it will automatically tune to the next higher Station 4 SCAN Button When the button is pressed it auto matically scans the radio stations upwards The SCAN feature steps through each Station starting from the initial station for ten seconds Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel 5
4. tance for braking Avoid sudden braking or steering e When braking with non ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up and down motion until the vehicle is stopped eS ann iS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 46 Driving your vehicle E170600AHM E110200AAM EU Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow sand or mud first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels Then shift back and forth between 1st First and R Reverse in vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle or R Reverse and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle Do not race the engine and spin the wheels as little as possible If you are still stuck after a few tries have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle P A CAUTION Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating transaxle dam age or failure and tire damage XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 47 P Driving your vehicle x NOTICE The ESC system if equipped should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle OUN056051 E110300AUN Smooth cornering Avoid braking or gear changing in cor ners especially when roads are wet Ideally corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration If you follow these suggestions tire wear will be
5. Call Name 2 Say Call lt john gt 3 Say Call lt john gt at lt home gt So am ised XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page mat Features of your vehicle e Dialing by Number A phone call can be made by dialing the spoken numbers The system can recog nize single digits from zero to nine 1 Press button 2 Say Call 3 Say Number when prompted 4 Say desired phone numbers 5 Say Dial to complete the number and make a call Tip A shortcut to each of the following func tions is available 1 Say Dial Number 2 Say Dial lt digit gt E Receiving a Phone Call When receiving a phone call a ringtone is audible from speakers and the audio system changes into telephone mode When receiving a phone call Incoming message and incoming phone number if available are displayed on the audio e To Answer a Call Press button on the steering wheel e To Reject a Call Press e button on the steering wheel e To Adjust Ring Volume Use VOLUME buttons on the steering wheel e To Transfer a Call to the Phone Secret Call Press and hold button on the steer ing wheel until the audio system trans fers a call to the phone m Talking on the Phone When talking on the phone Active Calls message and the other party s phone number if available are displayed on the audio e To Mute the Microphone Press bu
6. G270100AUN 1 Crankcase emission control system The positive crankcase ventilation sys tem is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow by gases being emitted from the crankcase This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose Inside the crankcase the fresh air mixes with blow by gases which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system G270200AUN 2 Evaporative emission control including ORVR Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery system The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmos phere The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 11 00 AM Page 61 Maintenance G270201AUN G270300AUN G270302AUN EC Canister 3 Exhaust emission control Engine exhaust gas precautions Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister When the engine is running the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve G270202AHM Purge Control Solenoid Valve PCSV The purge control solenoid valve is con trolled by the Engine Control Module ECM when the engine coolant temper ature is low during idling the PCSV clos es so that
7. HANDS FREE feature Making or receiving calls wirelessly through voice recognition STEREO HEADSET feature Playing music from cellular phones that sup ports A2DP feature wirelessly 1 VOLUME button Raises or lowers e Voice recognition engine of the speaker volume Bluetooth system supports 3 types of 2 MUTE Mute the microphone during a languages call English 3 TALK button Activates voice recogni US Spanish tion Canadian French x NOTICE e The phone must be paired to the sys tem before using Bluetooth features e Only one selected linked cellular phone can be used with the system at a time e Some phones are not fully compatible with this system Bluetooth Language Setting The system language can be changed by the following steps 1 Power on the audio system with the volume set to an audible level 2 Press and hold button on the steering wheel until the audio displays Please Wait The Bluetooth system will reply in currently selected language that it is changing to the next language System language cycles between English Canadian French and US Spanish 3 When completed the audio display returns to normal 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the next lan guage selection ee ee XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page a Features of your vehicle NOTE The phone needs to be paired again after changing system language Avo
8. If this indicator blinks when the ignition Switch is in the ON position before start ing the engine have the system checked by an authorized KIA dealer D150320AHM EU U1 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL check engine light if equipped This indicator light is part of the Engine Control System which monitors various emission control system components If this light illuminates while driving it indi cates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the emis sion control system This light will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion and will go out in a few seconds after the engine is started If it illuminates while driving or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position take your vehicle to the nearest authorized KIA dealer and have the sys tem checked Generally your vehicle will continue to be drivable but have the system checked by an authorized KIA dealer promptly A CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the emission con trol systems which could effect dri vability and or fuel economy A CAUTION If the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illumi nates potential catalytic converter damage is possible This could result in loss of engine power Have the Engine Control System inspect ed as soon as possible by an authori
9. P Driving your vehicle E150103AXM Towing capacity 2 4L Engine With without trailer brakes 750 kg 1650 lbs 3 5L Engine Without trailer brakes 750 kg 1650 Ibs With trailer brakes without trailer package 907kg 2000 Ibs with trailer package 1588 kg 3500 Ibs Towing capacity is the maximum trailer weight including its cargo weight your vehicle can tow E150104AUN Cargo capacity The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer E150105AUN C1 Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The com bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug gage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 635 kg 1400 Ibs and there will be five 68 kg 150 Ibs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg 650 lbs 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg or 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight ma
10. Removal except active headrest To remove the headrest raise it as far as it can go then press the release button 1 while pulling the headrest up 2 To reinstall the headrest put the head rest poles 3 into the holes while press ing the release button 1 Then adjust it to the appropriate height 11 39 AM Page 9 HNF2041 1 Active headrest if equipped The active headrest is designed to move forward and upward during a rear impact This helps prevent the driver s and front passenger s heads from moving back ward and thus helps minimize neck injuries For your safety the active headrest can t be removed If there is any problem with the active headrest take your vehicle to an authorized KIA dealer and have the system checked Safety features of your vehicle C010107AUN Seat heater if equipped The seat heater is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather With the ignition switch in the ON position push either of the switches to warm the driver s seat or the front passenger s seat During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat heater is not needed keep the switches in the OFF position x NOTICE With the seat heater switch in the ON position the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature Sot am Seis an seat heaters Damage to the seat XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 39 AM Page 10
11. The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally open ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehi cle 1 Open the rear door 2 Push the child safety lock located on the rear edge of the door to the lock position When the child safety lock is in the lock position the rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled 3 Close the rear door To open the rear door pull the outside door handle Even though the doors may be unlocked the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle 1 until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 TAILGATE D070100AAM EE asat OXM049011N Opening the tailgate The tailgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the key transmitter or smart key or central door lock switch If unlocked the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle switch and then pulling the handle up Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail gate unlock button on the smart key is pressed if equipped Once the tail gate is opened and then closed the tailgate is locked automatically 10 38 AM Page 19 x NOTICE In cold and wet climates door lock and door mechanisms may not work proper ly due to freezing conditions A CAUTION Make certain
12. i Fes 6 0 oO Pg ie is Ein 20 OXM049050C 1 Gauges D150201AHM Speedometer The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle The speedometer is calibrated in kilome ters per hour and or miles per hour 6 7 8 mys e k 5 x1000rpm if 5 xT000rpm OXM049055N D150202AHM Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi mate number of engine revolutions per minute rpm Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and or over revving the engine ae Engine temperature gauge cape XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 46 Features of your vehicle When the door is opened or if the engine is not started within 1 minute the tachometer pointer may move slightly in the ON position with the engine OFF This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running CAUTION Do not operate the engine within the tachometer s RED ZONE This may cause severe engine dam age D150203AUN OAM049033 This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON Do not continue driving with an overheat ed engine If your vehicle overheats refer to If the engine overheats in section 6 CAUTION If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the H position it indicates overheat ing that may damage the engine
13. 4 After the spare tire reaches the ground continue to turn the wrench counterclockwise and draw the spare tire outside Never rotate the wrench excessively oth erwise the spare tire carrier may be damaged 5 Remove the retainer 1 from the center of the spare tire OXM069005 To store the spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up 2 Place the wheel under the vehicle and install the retainer 1 through the wheel center 3 Turn the wrench clockwise until it clicks D 1VQA4022 F070300AAM EU U1 Changing tires 1 Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly 2 Place the transaxle shift lever in R Reverse with manual transaxle or P Park with automatic transaxle 3 Activate the hazard warning flash er XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 06 PM Page 10 What to do in an emergency ene 1 0A4023 4 Remove the wheel lug nut wrench r OXM069006 6 Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun gt jack jack handle and spare tire terclockwise one turn each but do from the vehicle not remove any nut until the tire 5 Block both the front and rear of the has been raised off the ground wheel that is diagonally opposite from the jack position XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 06 PM Page 11 What to do in an emergenc 3 E Bo a a Sa 0011054013 7 Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position cl
14. 4 Press the ENGINE START STOP but ton while depressing the brake pedal 5 In extremely cold weather below 18 C 0 F or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator Whether the engine is cold or warm it should be started without depressing the accelerator NOTICE If you leave the ENGINE START STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time the battery will discharge So am SiS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 10 P Driving your vehicle e Even if the smart key is in the vehicle if it is far away from you the engine may not start When the ENGINE START STOP but ton is in the ACC position or above if any door is opened the system checks for the smart key If the smart key is not in the vehicle the KEY OUT indicator will blink And if all doors are closed the chime will sound for 5 seconds The indicator or warning will turn off while the vehicle is moving Always have the smart key with you CAUTION If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P Park posi tion If the traffic and road condi tions permit you may put the shift lever in the N Neutral position while the vehicle is still moving and press the ENGINE START STOP button in an attempt to restart the engine XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 1
15. Before entering vehicle e Check all gauges e Be sure that all windows outside mir Check the operation of warning lights ror s and outside lights are clean when the ignition switch is turned to e Check the condition of the tires the ON position e Check under the vehicle for any sign of Release the parking brake and make leaks sure the brake warning light goes out e Be sure there are no obstacles behind For safe operation be sure you are famil you if you intend to back up iar with your vehicle and its equipment E020200AXM Necessary inspections Fluid levels such as engine oil engine should be checked on a regular basis at the exact interval depending on the fluid Further details are provided in section 7 Maintenance E020300AHM Before starting e Close and lock all doors e Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached e Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors eS ann iS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 4 P Driving your vehicle KEY POSITIONS IF EQUIPPED OXM059001N Illuminated ignition switch if equipped Whenever a front door is opened the ignition switch will illuminate for your con venience provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on It will also go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed OXM059029N Ignition switch p
16. For a small upgrade fee access to SIRIUS music channels and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet U S customers only For information on extended subscrip tion terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 NOTE Satellite Radio requires SIRIUS com patible receiver and a subscription serv ice fee after trial period Vehicles without a _ factory installed radio receiver require hardware pur chase and installation Please see your dealer for further details All fees and programming subject to change Subscriptions governed by the SIRIUS Terms amp Conditions available at www sirius com serviceterms Available only in the 48 contiguous United States and the District of Columbia Service available in Canada see www siriuscanada ca KIA shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to re activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS ee ee XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ab Features of your vehicle SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO PA710XM USA CANADA SIRIUSA Bhietonth POWER VOLUME INFO SETUP ENTER 3 4 5 6 a S l a CAT FILE TURE 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button 2 Channel Selection Button 3 Preset Selection B
17. Safety features of your vehicle OXM039008 Seat height for driver s seat Pull the front portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the front part of the seat cushion Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the rear part of the seat cushion Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired posi tion OXM039009 Lumbar support for driver s seat The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the button OHM038048N C010104AHM Headrest The driver s and front passenger s seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant s safety and comfort The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a rear collision So am SiS XM CAN ENG S 11 39 AM Page 8 fety features of your vehicle OXM039011 Adjusting the height up and down To raise the headrest pull it up to the desired position 1 To lower the head rest push and hold the release button 2 on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position 3 Adjusting the angle if equipped The headrest angle may be adjusted by pulling or pushing the lower part of the headrest Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck A CAUTION Excessive pulling or pushing may damage the headrest XM CAN ENG 3 0 11726 2009
18. XM CAN ENG FOREWORD QXP 11 26 2009 11 31 AM Page 1 KIA THE COMPANY Congratulations Your selection of a KIA was a wise investment It will give you years of driving pleasure Now that you are the owner of a KIA vehicle you ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your vehicle and the company like What is a KIA Who is KIA What does KIA mean Here are some answers First KIA is the oldest car company in Korea It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on building high quality vehicles at affordable prices The first syllable KI in the word KIA means to arise from to the world or to come up out of to the world The second syllable a means Asia So the word KIA means to arise from or to come up out of Asia to the world Drive safely and enjoy your Kia XM CAN ENG FOREWORD QXP 11 26 2009 11 31 AM Page 2 FOREWORD Thank you for choosing a KIA vehicle When you require service remember that your KIA Dealer knows your vehicle best Your dealer has factory trained tech nicians recommended special tools genuine KIA replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction Because subsequent owners require this important information as well this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold This manual will familiarize you with operational mainte nance and safety information
19. ing the height adjuster button 2 Release the button to lock the anchor into position Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position ah OXM039026 B200A02NF Height adjustment belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 22 P Safety features of your vehicle C020106AUN Seat belts Front passenger and rear seat 3 point system with combination locking retractor To fasten your seat belt Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems Although a combina tion retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position it is strongly recommended that children always be seated in the rear seat NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle This type of seat belt combines the fea tures of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic lock ing retractor seat belt To fasten your seat belt pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle There will be an audible click when the tab locks into the buckle
20. tion allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes x NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is start ed These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti lock brake system is functioning properly e Even with the anti lock brake system your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you e Always slow down when cornering The anti lock brake system cannot pre vent accidents resulting from exces sive speeds On loose or uneven road surfaces operation of the anti lock brake system may result in a longer stopping dis tance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system CAUTION If the ABS warning light is on and stays on you may have a problem with the ABS In this case howev er your regular brakes will work normally The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON During that time the ABS will go through self diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal If the light stays on you may have a problem with your ABS Contact an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle J CAUTION e When you drive on a road having poor traction such as an icy road and have operated your brakes continuou
21. 11 00 AM Page 55 Maintenance p OJB037800 CAUTION e Water washing in the engine com partment including high pressure water washing may cause the fail ure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electri cal electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them Waxing Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing Use a good quality liquid or paste wax and follow the manufacturer s instructions Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster Removing oil tar and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish Be sure to re wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing CAUTION e Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish Do not use steel wool abrasive cleaners acid detergents or strong detergents containing high alkaline or caustic agents on chrome plated or anodized alu minum parts This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration G230103AUN Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense x NOTICE If your vehicle is damaged and requires any m
22. 3rd row seat 11 Seatback folding 12 Headrest if equipped OXM039001N 1 XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 12 4 2009 11 15 AM Page 3 Safety features of your vehicle So am Seis XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 38 AM Page 4 Safety features of your vehicle OXM039002 Front seat adjustment manual Forward and backward To move the seat forward or backward 1 Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it 2 Slide the seat to the position you desire 3 Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place Adjust the seat before driving and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever If the seat moves it is not locked properly C010101AHM Cp XM CAN ENG 3 0 11726 2009 11 39 AM Page 5 P Safety features of your vehicle OXM039003 C010102AHM Seatback angle To recline the seatback 1 Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback recline lever 2 Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire 3 Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock OXM039004 C010103APB Seat height for driver s seat To change the height of the seat push the lever upwards or downwards e To lower the seat cushion push the lever down se
23. 420kPa 60psi ene TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEGNEME NTS SUR LES PHEI al ETLE GHARG EMENT The conblned velit of occupants and cargo should never exceed pre hg or Le poids total des occupants et du changement ne doit jagis dpesser 0 ig w120 b COLD TIRE PRESSURE PEL TIE S SEE OWNER S Z mannikin i jm ra FOR P235 60R18 men 298 INFORMATION OXM059103N The label located on the driver s door sill gives the original tire size cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight E150101AXM Vehicle capacity weight 5 persons 420 kg 930 Ibs 7 persons 506 kg 1120 Ibs Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi mum combined weight of occupants and cargo If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer the combined weight includes the tongue load E150102AXM Seating capacity Total 5 persons Front seat 2 persons Rear seat 3 persons persons Front seat 2 persons Rear seat 5 persons Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver your vehicle may carry However the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight or load limit including occupants and cargo the vehicle can carry XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 5 6 2010 5 13 PM Page 63
24. D030200AEN EU Theft alarm stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the system is armed e A front or rear door is opened without using the ignition key or transmitter or smart key e The tailgate is opened without using the transmitter or smart key e The engine hood is opened The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for approximately 27 seconds and repeat the horn 3 times unless the system is dis armed To turn off the system unlock the doors with the ignition key or transmitter or smart key D030400BEN EU Disarmed stage The system will be disarmed when the doors and tailgate are unlocked with the transmitter or smart key or the ignition key After depressing the unlock button the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that the system is disarmed After depressing the unlock button if any door or tailgate is not opened within 30 seconds the system will be rearmed x NOTICE e Avoid trying to start the engine while the alarm is activated The vehicle starting motor is disabled during the theft alarm stage If the system is not disarmed with the transmitter insert the key into the ignition switch turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 30 seconds Then the system will be disarmed if equipped e If you lose your keys consult your authorized KIA dealer CAUTION Do
25. Driver Safety Power Window Module Passenger Power Window Relay Power Window Main Switch E a CAN 0 i Passenger Power Window Switch Rear Power Window Switch RH MODULE 15A Audio A V amp Navigation Head Unit RF Receiver IPM BCM B Rear Monitor Instrument Cluster IND Digital Clock Front A C Control Module Data Link Connector Door Warning ROOM LP 10A Switch Personal Room Lamp Room Lamp Auto Cut Relay Overhead Console MAP Lamp Room Lamp Cargo Lamp Driver Passenger Vanity Lamp Electro Chromic Mirror DOOR LP Driver Passenger Door Scuff Lamp DVD Player Can Door Lock Unlock Relay ICM Relay Box Two Turn Unlock Relay S label ae Driver Passenger Door Lock Actuator Rear Door Lock Actuator LH RH S XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 11 00 AM Page 52 p Maintenance Engine compartment fuse panel Description Fuserating Protectedcomponet IPM Fuse S HTR FRT P SEAT Power Connector MODULE ROOM LP DOOR LP Blower Relay Rear Defogger Relay yee ESC Control Module Multipurpose Check Connector ABS 2 ESC Control Module Multipurpo se Check Connector 60A IPM Fuse HAZARD TPMS F LID IPM Fuse DR LOCK SUNROOF 4WD PDM SMART KEY Start Relay W O Smart Key Ignition Switch With Smart Key PDM Relay Box IGN2 Relay TRAILER Trailer Power Outlet b IGN 1 W O Smart Key Ignition Switch With Smart Key PDM Relay Box IGN1 Relay D e IPM Fuse P WDW LH P WDW RH B A HORN
26. Features of your vehicle Manual heating and air condition ing The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pressing buttons or turning knob s other than the AUTO button In this case the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons or knob s selected 1 Start the engine 2 Set the mode to the desired position For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling Heating Na Cooling ea 3 Set the temperature control to the desired position 4 Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position 5 Set the fan speed control to the desired speed 6 If air conditioning is desired turn the air conditioning system on Press the AUTO button in order to con vert to full automatic control of the sys tem OXM049154 Mode selection The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the venti lation system The air flow outlet port is converted as follows gt 0 0 TH o pM zi e Nei lt Refer to the illustration in the Manual cli mate control system Face Level Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face Additionally each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet Bi Level Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor Floor Level Most of the air flow is directed to the floor with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield
27. To install the roof antenna turn it clockwise CAUTION e Before entering a place with a low height clearance be sure that the roof antenna is removed Be sure to remove the roof anten na before washing the car in an automatic car wash or it may be damaged When reinstalling your roof antenna it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception But it could be removed when parking the vehi cle or when loading cargo on the roof rack When cargo is loaded on the roof rack do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio gxp 4 14 2010 10 52 AM Page ah Features of your vehicle D300200AEN Steering wheel audio controls if equipped The steering wheel may incorporate audio control buttons These buttons are installed to promote safe driving CAUTION Do not operate audio remote con trol buttons simultaneously D300204AHM VOLUME VOL 1 e Push the lever upward to increase the volume e Push the lever downward to decrease the volume D300203AHM SEEK PRESET 2 The SEEK PRESET button has different functions based on the system mode For the following functions the button should be pressed for 0 8 seconds or more RADIO mode It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button CD USB iPod mode It will function as the FF REW button If the SEEK P
28. automatically press the corresponding button manually Automatic climate control system To defog inside windshield 1 Set the fan speed to the desired posi tion 2 Select desired temperature 3 Press the defroster button 4 The outside fresh air position will be selected automatically and the air con ditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature If the air conditioning and outside fresh air position are not selected automatical ly adjust the corresponding button man ually If the WY position is selected lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed OXM049168 To defrost outside windshield 1 Set the fan speed to the highest posi tion 2 Set the temperature to the extreme hot HI position 3 Press the defroster button 7 4 The outside fresh air position will be selected automatically and the air con ditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle Defogging logic To reduce the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield the air intake or air conditioning is controlled automati cally according to certain conditions such as or Mt position To cancel or return to the defogging logic do the fol lowing 10 48 AM Page 93 P OXM049169 Manual climate control system 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion 2 Turn the
29. grades in excess of 6 pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not over heat If the needle of the coolant tem perature gauge moves across the dial towards H HOT pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so and allow the engine to idle until it cools down You may pro ceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently You must decide driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade to reduce the possi bility of engine and transaxle overheating E140407AUN EA Parking on hills Generally if you have a trailer attached to your vehicle you should not park your vehicle on a hill People can be seriously or fatally injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged if they unexpectedly roll downhill However if you ever have to park your trailer on a hill here s how to do it 1 Pull the vehicle into the parking space Turn the steering wheel in the direction of the curb right if headed downhill left if headed up hill If the vehicle has a manual transaxle place the car in neutral If the vehicle has an automatic transaxle place the car in P Park Set the parking brake and shut off the vehicle 4 Place chocks under the trailer wheels 5 on the down hill side of the wheels Start the vehicle hold the brakes shift to neutral release the parking brake and slowly release the brakes until the trailer chocks ab
30. help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns E140402AUN Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when youre towing a trailer And because of the increased vehicle length you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Due to the added load to the engine when going uphill the vehicle may also take longer to pass than it would on flat ground E140403AUN Backing up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move your hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide yOu E140404AUN Making turns When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects near the edge of the road Avoid jerky or sud den maneuvers Signal well in advance before turning or lane changes XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 56 Driving your vehicle E140405AFD Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly connected the trailer lights will also flash to alert other drivers you re about to turn change lanes
31. may differ from the illustration OXM049151L OXM049141 XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 46 AM Page 84 OXM049152 Automatic heating and air condi tioning The automatic climate control system is controlled by simply setting the desired temperature The Full Automatic Temperature Control FATC system automatically controls the heating and cooling system as follows 1 Press the AUTO button The modes fan speeds air intake and air condi tioning will be controlled automatically by setting the temperature 2 Set the temperature switch to the desired temperature If the temperature is set to the lowest setting Lo the air conditioning sys tem will operate continuously 3 To turn the automatic operation off select any button or switch of the fol lowing e Mode selection button e Air conditioning button e Front windshield defroster button e Air intake control button e Fan speed control switch The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 23 C 73 F OXM049153 x NOTICE Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 46 AM Page 85 P
32. 6 ij SCAN MUTE vrdi VOLUME af REPEAT Button CD Indicator crs SCAN Play Button INFO Button CD Loading Slot CD Eject Button CD Selection Button Automatic Track Seek Button 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RANDOM play Button 10 FOLDER Moving Button 11 SEARCH Knob amp ENTER Button XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page mah Features of your vehicle Using CD Player 1 CD Loading Slot Insert a CD label side up and gently push in while ignition switch is on ACC or ON The audio automatically switches to CD mode and begins to play the CD If the audio was turned off audio power will automatically turned on as the CD is inserted This audio only recognizes 12cm size CD DA Audio CD or ISO data CD MP3 CD If UDF data CD or non CD e g DVD is inserted Reading Error message will be displayed and the disc will be eject ed N CAUTION Do not insert a CD if CD indicator is lit 2 CD Eject Button e Press button to eject the CD This button works regardless of ignition switch status 3 CD Selection Button If there is a CD in the CD DECK it switch es to CD mode If there is no CD then the message NO DISC will become displayed on the LCD for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode 4 Track Selection Button e Press TRACK V button for less than 0 8 seconds to play from the beginning of current song Press TRACK V butt
33. 60 XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 2 p Maintenance ENGINE COMPARTMENT E 2 4L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 4 Radiator Cap 5 Engine Oil Filler Cap 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Air Cleaner 9 Fuse Box 10 Negative Battery Terminal 11 Positive Battery Terminal if equipped WZ x The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OXMO079001N G010000AAM EU XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 3 Maintenance E 3 5L Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Fuse box Negative battery terminal Positive battery terminal Radiator cap 9 Engine oil dipstick 10 Power steering fluid reservoir CON OOF WDM gt 11 Windshield washer fluid reservoir if equipped x The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OXM079100 eS am na eins XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 10 56 AM Page 4 MAINTENANCE SERVICES G020000AHM You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection proce dures Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehi cle we strongly recommend that you have an
34. A CON REAR AMP Sub Start Relay PCM Transaxle Range Switch Alternator G6DC ESC Control Module Multipurpose Check Connector Stop Lamp Switch G4KE B UP LP Back Up Lamp Relay A T Back Up Lamp Switch M T XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 11 00 AM Page 53 Description ECU ECU 3 Maintenance Protected component Engine Control Relay G4KE Ignition Coil 1 2 3 4 Condenser G6DC Ignition Coil 1 2 3 4 5 6 Condenser 1 2 G4KE Variable Intake Manifold Valve Crankshaft Position Sensor Immobilizer Module Camshaft Position Sensor 1 2 Oil Control Valve 1 2 Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve Valve Oil Control Valve 1 2 Exhaust Oil Control Valve 1 2 Intake Canister Close Valve SENSOR 1 10A Canister Close Valve Cooling Fan Low Relay G6DC Variable Intake Manifold Valve 1 2 Immobilizer Module Canister Purge Control Solenoid SENSOR 2 G6DC Cooling Fan Low Relay Stop Lamp Switch G4KE Injector 1 2 3 4 A C Relay SENSOR G6DC PCM Injector 1 2 3 4 5 6 A C Relay P SENSOR 4 15A G4KE Oxygen Sensor Up Down Fuel Pump Relay D G6DC PCM Oxygen Sensor 1 2 3 4 Fuel Pump Relay Variable Charge Motion Actuator A CON A C Relay F PUMP Fuel Pump Relay XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 11 00 AM Page 54 APPEARANCE CARE Exterior care G230101AUN Exterior general caution lt is very important to follow the label directions when using
35. AM Page 47 Safety features of your vehicle C040301AXM EU Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system Indicator Warning light Condition detected by the occupant detection PASSENGER AIR system BAG OFF indicator SRS warning light Front Passenger i light air bag 2 Child restraint system e et peas 4 There is a malfunction Activated in the system 1 The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person s size to determine whether the D air bag should deploy It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS thus allowing the airbag to deploy To maximize safety do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat 2 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 48 Safety features of your vehicle ae senger seat if the PASSENGER AIR XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 49 Safety features of your vehicle T If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi 3 NOTICE cator is still on ask the passenger to ze 5 i move to the rear seat The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 sec onds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started If the front passenger seat is occupied the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds B990A010
36. Driver s and front passenger s seat belt buckle sensors 13 Driver s front anchor pre tensioner The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre tensioner seat belt deployment The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position after which the SRS air bag warning light should go out Driver s front air bag 1 B240B01L The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger s panel above the glove box When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle it will automatically deploy the front air bags fe So am SiS XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 44 Safety features of your vehicle Driver s front air bag 2 B240B02L Upon deployment tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags Driver s front air bag 3 B240B03L A fully inflated air bag in combination with a properly worn seat belt slows the driver s or the passenger s forward motion reducing the risk of head and chest injury After complete inflation the air bag immediately starts de
37. E 5 62 Tire replacement rreereterstrseeseeeeteeeteee tte teeneneneee 7 36 Cargo capacity teeeteenenenenetteeneneee 5 63 Tire rotation ee re ee rr eer eee E 7 34 Certification label sne sine E E elasionses 5 65 Tire sidewall labeling ttre ttt terete 7 38 Seating capacity rcs teeetereteeeee terse tneenenenenens 5 62 Tire terminology and definitions e teeotseneestr er eres 7 42 Tire and loading information label s 5 62 Tire traction VT rrr ee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee 7 37 Towing capacity ee ee ee re ee ee 5 63 Wheel alignment and tire balances ttt 7 35 Vehicle capacity weight etetett 5 62 Wheel replacement 1 1 11rrreeetereretereeeetreteeeeee 7 37 Vehicle weight glossary street teenies 5 67 Towing CT er eee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee 6 16 Base curb weight eens isesdisieciene N ceeaueluxeeess 5 67 Emergency towing vrrererrrreeeeeserereerneeeeeneee 6 17 Cargo weight rrr teeeteneneneneteteneenenene 5 67 Towing capacity recesses rete reeneneneneenenens 5 63 GAW Gross axle weight srr 5 67 Trailer towing ick ateuewiaeswie a a N a eke knee kex exuesieriaesaiaaeed 5 53 GAWR Gross axle weight rating E T A seus 5 67 Tite He E 5 54 GVW Gross vehicle weight tities 5 67 Safety Chains srrceerrerresreeeereeeseteseeseetsenenenenenenenens 5 54 GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating sre 5 67 Trailer brakes Sr ee ee re rr ere 5 54 Vehicle curb weight Se re ee eee eee 5 67 Weight of the trailer saeruidaers Queene races cnmbuesmenensueecemen ues 5 60 Transaxle W Automat
38. For rolling code garage door openers follow steps 2 6 For Canadian Programming please fol low the Canadian Programming section For help with determining whether your garage is non rolling code or rolling code please refer to the garage door Openers Owner s manual or contact HomeLink customer service at 1 800 355 3515 Flashing OHD046307N 2 Press and hold the button on the HomeLink system you wish to train and the button on the transmitter while the transmitter is approximately 2 8 cm 1 to 3 inches away from the mirror Do not release the buttons until step 3 has been completed 3 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both but tons may be released The rapid flash ing light indicates successful program ming of the new frequency signal x NOTICE Some gate and garage door openers may require you to replace step 3 with the cycling procedure noted in the Canadian Programming section of this document Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code equipped devices with the rolling code feature follow these instruc tions after completing the Programming portion of this text A second person may make the following training proce dures quicker amp easier 4 Locate the learn or smart button on the device s motor head unit Exact location and color of the butt
39. Hazardous driving conditions second gear Accelerate slowly to Reducing the risk of a rollover When hazardous driving conditions are avoid spinning the drive wheels _ This multi purpose passenger vehicle is encountered such as water snow ice Use sand rock salt or other non slip defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle SUV mud sand or similar hazards follow material under the drive wheels to pro SUV s have higher ground clearance and these suggestions vide traction when stalled in ice snow a narrower track to make them capable e Drive cautiously and allow extra dis or mud of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteris tics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road which allows you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger vehi cles any more than low slung sports vehicles are designed to perform satis factorily in off road conditions Due to this risk driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts In a rollover crash an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers do not load your roof rack with heavy cargo and never modify your vehicle in any way
40. Operation of the rear parking aa the driver during backward movement of assist system the vehicle by chiming if any object is Operating condition a a This system will activate when the indi l l cator on the rear parking assist OFF button is not illuminated If you desire to deactivate the rear parking assist system press the rear parking assist OFF button again The indicator on the button will illuminate To turn the This system is a supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver The sensing range and objects detectable by the back sen sors are limited Whenever backing up system on press the button again ay as much attention to what is behind ae ou Be vail would A 5 PA Sa a The indicator on the button will go off If the vehicle is moving at a speed over ioe Dalaig ASSIS IEM 5 km h 3 mph the system may not be activated correctly e The sensing distance while the rear parking assist system is in operation is approximately 120 cm 47 in So am SiS XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 42 AM Page 60 P Features of your vehicle e When more than two objects are sensed at the same time the closest one will be recognized first Types of warning sound e When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm 47 in to 32 in from the rear bumper Buzzer beeps intermittently e When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm 31 in to 16 in f
41. Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 2 82 inch of tread remains UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction tempera ture and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing proce dures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle Capacity Weight The num ber of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg 150 Ibs plus the rated cargo and luggage load Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight accessory weight and normal occu pant weight and driving by 2 Vehicle Placard A label permanent ly attached to a vehicle showing the Original equipment tire size and rec ommended inflation pressure XM CAN ENG 7 gxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 10 58 AM Page 44 All season tires KIA specifie
42. Safety features of your vehicle J CAUTION e When cleaning the seats do not use an organic solvent such as thinner benzene alcohol and gasoline Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats To prevent overheating the seat heater do not place blankets cushions or seat covers on the seats while the seat heater is in operation Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with OXM039015 C010108AAM Seatback pocket if equipped warming components could occur b C010307AHM C1 XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 39 AM Page 11 Safety features of your vehicle Folding the rear seat The rear seatbacks can be folded to facil itate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle Rear seat adjustment Seatback angle 2nd row seat To recline the seatback 1 Pull up the seatback recline lever 2 Hold the lever and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire 3 Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 39 AM Page 12 Safety features of your vehicle 2nd row seat 1 Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket if equipped between the rear seatback and cushion and insert the rear seat belt webbing into the guide to prevent the seat belt from being dam aged 2 Set the fro
43. The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in kilopascals kPa or pounds per square inch psi before a tire has built up heat from driving Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and Cargo DOT Markings The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric des ignator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corre sponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The
44. When an adult is seated in the front pas BAG OFF indicator is on turn the igni tion switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit properly sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 50 Safety features of your vehicle WARNING Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant detection system never install a child restraint system in the front passenger s seat A deploying air bag can forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injuries or death Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat Children too large for child restraints should use the avail able lap shoulder belts No matter what type of crash children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated when the front passenger s seat is occupied by an adult and he she sits properly sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor have that person sit in the rear seat Continued Continued e If the
45. When to replace seat belts The entire in use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident This should be done even if no damage is visible Additional questions concern ing seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized KIA dealer XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 31 Safety features of your vehicle CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM C030000AHM EU Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident sudden stop or sudden maneuver According to accident statis tics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country Child and or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the require ments of the safety standards of your country Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by seat belt or by a tether anchor and or LATCH anchors if equipped Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured For small children and babies a child seat or infant seat must be used Before buying a particular child restrain
46. XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 47 P Features of your vehicle OAM049034 D150204BHM EE Fuel gauge The fuel gauge indicates the approxi mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank The fuel tank capacity is given in sec tion 8 The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light which will illumi nate when the fuel tank is nearly empty On inclines or curves the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank A CAUTION Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damag ing the catalytic converter D150205AAM EU Odometer Tripmeter TRIP computer if equipped The trip computer is a microcomputer controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving such as odometer triometer distance to empty average speed driving time aver age fuel consumption and the ECOMIN DER Indicator ECO ON OFF mode on the display when the ignition switch is in the ON position All stored driving infor mation except odometer and distance to empty is reset if the battery is discon nected So am iS XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 48 Features of your vehicle The odometer is always displayed until the display is turned off Press the TRIP button for less than 1 seco
47. a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side win dow defrosters Floor Defrost Level A C D F G Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters Defrost Level A D Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle arnnsa OXM049145N Instrument panel vents The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel if equipped Also you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown 10 44 AM Page 77 P OXM049146 Temperature control The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flow ing from the ventilation system To change the air temperature in the pas senger compartment turn the knob to the right position for warm and hot air or left position for cooler air OXM049147 Air intake control The air intake control is used to select the outside fresh air position or recircu lated air position To change the air intake control position press the control button Sam Ais XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 45 AM Page 78 Features of your vehicle Recirculated air position With the recirculated air position selected air from the passenge
48. about your new vehicle It is sup plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle KIA offers a great variety of options components and features for its various models Therefore some of the equipment described in this manual along with the various illustrations may not be applicable to your particular vehicle The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing KIA reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation If you have questions always check with your KIA dealer We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your KIA vehicle 2010 Kia Canada Inc All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Kia Canada Inc Printed in U S A XM CAN ENG FOREWORD QXP 11 26 2009 11 31 AM Page 3 Features of your velice EN TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 What to doin an emergeny n eeneg m e e e e m e XM
49. authorized KIA dealer perform this work An authorized KIA dealer has factory trained technicians and genuine KIA parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service see an authorized KIA dealer Inadequate incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational prob lems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage an accident or person al injury G020100AUN EU Owner s responsibility x NOTICE Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner s responsibility You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages You need this information to establish your compli ance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty amp Consumer Information manual Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an author ized KIA dealer An authorized KIA deal er meets KIA s high service quality stan dards and receives technical support from KIA in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction G020200AUN EU Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service may result in problems This section gives ins
50. be allowed to clog with dirt trapped water in these areas can cause rusting Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish e Do not use any abrasive cleaner pol ishing compound solvent or wire brushes on aluminum wheels They may scratch or damage the finish e Use only mild soap or neutral deter gent and rinse thoroughly with water Also be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads This helps pre vent corrosion Avoid washing the wheels with high speed car wash brushes Do not use any cleaners containing acid or acid detergents It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 11 00 AM Page 57 Maintenance G230107AHM Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corrosion By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corro sion we produce vehicles of the highest quality However this is only part of the job To achieve the long term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver the owner s cooperation and assistance is also required Common causes of corrosion The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are e Road salt dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle e Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones gravel abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unpro tec
51. before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation Features of your vehicle L OYF049101 D200200ASA Front windshield washers In the OFF position pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1 3 cycles Use this function when the windshield is dirty The spray and wiper operation will con tinue until you release the lever If the washer does not work check the washer fluid level If the fluid level is not sufficient you will need to add appropri ate non abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side So am Seis XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 43 AM Page 70 Features of your vehicle CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the washer pump do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty OXM049239N 424i _ OXM049238N D200300AAM Press the button to spray rear washer Rear window wiper and washer fluid and to run the rear wipers switch if equipped The spray and wiper operation will con Press the switch to operate the rear tinue until you press the button wiper N CAUTION Press the switch again to turn off the rear e To prevent possible damage to wiper operation the wipers or windshield do not ON Normal wiper operation operate the wipers when the windshield is dry To prevent damage t
52. brake warning light by turning E070300AHM EC Anti lock brake system ABS W 75 engine This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the igni tion switch in the START or ON position Before driving be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running there may be a mal function in the brake system Immediate attention is necessary If at all possible cease driving the vehi cle immediately If that is not possible use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe loca tion or repair shop XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 31 Drivin our vehicle The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels If the wheels are going to lock the ABS system repeatedly modu lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels When you apply your brakes under con ditions which may lock the wheels you may hear a tik tik sound from the brakes or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal This is normal and it means your ABS is active In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situa tion do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situa
53. brakes This can cause them to overheat and malfunction Instead when you are driving down a long hill slow down and shift to a lower gear When you do this engine braking will help slow down the vehicle Slow down before shifting to a lower gear This will help avoid over revving the engine which can cause damage Slow down when you encounter cross winds This gives you much better con trol of your vehicle Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse The transaxle can be dam aged if you do not To shift into reverse depress the clutch move the shift lever to neutral then shift to the reverse position 12 01 PM Page 14 Driving your vehicle e Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface Be especially careful when braking accelerating or shifting gears On a slippery surface an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 15 Driving your vehicle AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED S att A UP ay TO shift depress the brake pedal when the ignition switch is in the ON position c gt The shift lever can be shifted freely OXM059009 EQ60000AAM EU E060100AAM EU Automatic transaxle operation The automatic transaxle has 6 forward Speeds and one reverse speed The indi vid
54. by the manufactur ers warranty if they result from the use of 1 Gasohol containing more than 10 ethanol 2 Gasoline or methanol 3 Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol gasohol containing XM CAN ENG 1 QXP 11 26 2009 Introduction 11 33 AM Page 4 E85 fuel is an alternative fuel com prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per cent gasoline and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles E85 is not compatible with your vehicle Use of E85 may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle s engine and fuel system KIA recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceed ing 10 CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance prob lems caused by the use of E85 fuel CAUTION Never use gasohol which contains methanol Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs dri vability A020104AUN Use of MTBE KIA recommends avoiding fuels contain ing MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether over 15 0 vol Oxygen Content 2 7 weight in your vehicle Fuel containing MTBE over 15 0 vol Oxygen Content 2 7 weight may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting J CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance prob lems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels con
55. corresponds to that tire s designed maximum safe oper ating speed Maximum Speed 180 km h 112 mph 190 km h 118 mph 210 km h 130 mph 240 km h 149 mph Above 240 km h 149 mph G201003AHM 3 Checking tire life TIN Tire Identification Number Any tires that are over 6 years old based on the manufacturing date including the spare tire should be replaced by new ones You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall possibly on the inside of the wheel displaying the DOT Code The DOT Code is a series of num bers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters The manufactur ing date is designated by the last four digits characters of the DOT code DOT XXXX XXXX OOOO The front part of the DOT means a plant code number tire size and tread pattern and the last four num bers indicate week and year manu factured For example DOT XXXX XXXX 1610 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2010 XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 40 p Maintenance G201004AEN G201006AUN Tread wear 4 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rub ber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others The letter R means radial ply con struction the letter D means diago nal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply c
56. evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine After the engine warms up during ordinary driving the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine system The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance G270301AUN Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations In addition damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty carbon monoxide e Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes Therefore if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle have it inspected and repaired immediately If you ever sus pect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle drive it only with all the windows fully open Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 11 00 AM Page 62 e Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas Such as garages any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area e When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running adjust the ventilation system as needed to draw outside air into the vehicle e Never sit in a parked or stopped
57. gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade and release the parking brake Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill the vehicle may have a ten dency to roll backwards Shifting the shift lever into 2 Second Gear will help prevent the vehicle from rolling oe backwards XM CAN ENG 5 gxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 21 Driving your vehicle FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD IF EQUIPPED Engine power can be delivered to all front and rear wheels for maximum traction 4WD is useful when extra traction is required on road such as when driving on slippery muddy wet or snow covered roads These vehicles are not designed for challenging off road use Occasional off road use such as_ established unpaved roads and trails are OK It is always important when traveling off high way that the driver carefully reduces the speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those condi tions In general off road conditions pro vide less traction and braking effective ness than normal road conditions The driver must be especially alert to avoid driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to either side These factors must be carefully consid ered when driving off road Keeping the vehicle in contact with the driving surface and under control in these conditions is always the driver s responsibility for the Safety of him he
58. held to a minimum OCM053010 E110400AUN Driving at night Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight here are some important tips to remember e Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles as it may be more difficult to see at night especially in areas where there may not be any street lights eS amo Stoll XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle 12 02 PM Page 48 e Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver s headlights e Keep your headlights clean and prop erly aimed on vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more diffi cult to see at night Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles You could be temporarily blinded and it will take several seconds for your eyes to read just to the darkness 1VQA3003 E110500AUN Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous especially if you re not pre pared for the slick pavement Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain e A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle so slow down e Keep your windshield wiping equip ment in good shape Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield e If your tire
59. in place seat belt from being damaged 5 Unfold the headrest manually 2 Set the 2nd row seatback to the 6 Return the rear seat belt to the proper upright position position 3 Pull on the seatback folding strap then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 40 AM Page 15 Safety features of your vehicle N CAUTION Damaging rear seat belt buckles When you fold the rear 2nd and or 3rd row seatback insert the buckle in the pocket between the rear seat back and cushion Doing so can prevent the buckle from being dam aged by the rear seatback N CAUTION Rear seat belts When returning the rear 2nd and or 3rd row seatbacks to the upright position remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position Routing the seat belt web bing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats OUNO026140 So am SiS D Headrest XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 40 AM Page 16 Safety features of your vehicle Outside Center if equipped OHM038049N C010303AHM The rear seat s is equipped with head rests in all the seating positions for the occupant s safety and comfort The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision 2nd row headrest Adjusting the height up and down To raise the hea
60. key interlock system vaio ie AEE A T sieeve wees 5 19 Immobilizer system PPePTeETETESE TEST Tererereeerreee rere reer ere errr eee ee 4 3 Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster 17e 1 6 Indicators and warnings POerererereeeererererere reer er errr eee rere rere eee 4 51 Inside rearview mirror errr rere eee teat eee eeeaees 4 36 P Jack and tools E A A N E E E AEE TT 6 7 Jump starting RAER A A A S AAEE ERA AA R A A canes 6 4 Index QG Instrument cluster ee ee E E ee ee eer re 4 44 Engine temperature gauge A E ie 8 p oeie s oe E E 4 46 Gauge Fuel gauge vereeeseeereteererertererereererereetererestetereneetens 4 47 Engine temperature GCAO e tettateeesensteanenstodtennetmepriens 4 46 Instrument panel illumination vce eeees 4 45 Fuel gauge E E ET T A E E E AA TET 4 47 Odometer Tripmeter Trip computer EAE EEE AIEA E ET 4 47 Glassroof see panoramic SUNLOOL tteeerereeereeeereeseeeeeeeeceeee 4 30 Speedometer E a E E saalsanekeetsuienewentnns 4 45 e oy ee 4 94 T ice ue Acero E 4 45 Warning and indicators E Te TE ee eee TT 4 51 H Instrument panel illumination eeren 4 45 Instrument panel overview A E E A E E wise bipverene sore 2 3 Hazard warning flasher etetett 4 62 Interior caren res 7 59 Hazardous driving conditions a A T S 5 45 Interior features Pe ee ee eee eT ee ee eee 4 96 Headlight escort function ee ee re ee eee eee 4 63 Clock ee ee ee ee ee ee er ee 4 98 PV acl be awit nonin ia niian iii 3 7 3 16 Cup holders rrtreeerererereeerreeene
61. lock a door without the key push the inside door lock button 1 or central door lock switch 2 to the Lock posi tion and close the door 3 e If you lock the door with the central door lock switch 2 all vehicle doors will lock automatically x NOTICE Always remove the ignition key engage the parking brake close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended Sam iS manu the vehicle XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 38 AM Page 16 Features of your vehicle e If the inner door handle of the drivers or front passenger s door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position the button will unlock and the door will open if equipped e Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened d OXM049007 Operating door locks from inside D050201AHM EU With the door lock button e To unlock a door push the door lock button 1 to the Unlock position The red mark 2 on the button will be visi ble e To lock a door push the door lock but ton 1 to the Lock position If the door is locked properly the red mark 2 on the door lock button will not be visible To open a door pull the door handle 3 outward XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 38 AM Page 17 Features of your vehicle Driver s door e If the key is in the ignition switch and p any front door i
62. may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield the Auto light system may not work prop erly ay i F F a OAM049044 D190500AUN High beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights push the lever away from you Pull it back for low beams The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on To prevent the battery from being dis charged do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running OAM049043 To flash the headlights pull the lever towards you It will return to the normal low beam position when released The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 42 AM Page 66 P OAM049045 D190600AUN U1 Turn signals and lane change sig nals The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function To turn on the turn signals move the lever up or down A The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn sig nal is operating They will self cancel after a turn is completed If the indicator continues to flash after a turn manually return the lever to the OFF position To signal a lane change move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position B The lever will retu
63. may not be as high as your vehi cle s original equipment tires You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear Check with the tire dealer for max imum speed recommendations Do not install studded tires without first checking local state and municipal regu lations for possible restrictions against their use XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 51 P Driving your vehicle E120200AUN Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system lubri cates the water pump and prevents freezing Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7 Before winter have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter E120300AUN Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system Visually inspect the bat tery and cables as described in section 7 The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized KIA dealer or a service station E120400BUN Change to winter weight oil if necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity winter weight oil be used during cold weather See section 8 for recommendations If you aren t sure wh
64. may vary with respect to grade ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 41 Maintenance Traction AA A B amp C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on spec ified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perform ance Temperature A B amp C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure Grades B and A represent higher levels of perform ance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law XM CAN ENG 7 gxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 10 58 AM Page 42 G201100AAM EC Tire terminology and definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire Air pressure is expressed in kilopascal kPa or pounds per square inch psi Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional acces sories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transaxle power seats and air con ditioning Aspect Ratio
65. mode selection knob to the defrost position 0 3 Press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds The indicator light in the air intake control button will blink 3 times with 0 5 second of interval It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the pro grammed status If the battery has been discharged or dis connected it resets to the defog logic status OXM049170 Automatic climate control system 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion 2 Select the defroster position pressing the defroster button 3 While pressing the air conditioning button A C press the air intake con trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec onds The A C display blinks 3 times with 0 5 second of interval It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status If the battery has been discharged or dis connected it resets to the defog logic Status ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 48 AM Page 94 Features of your vehicle STORAGE COMPARTMENTS D270000AHM These compartments can be used to store small items A CAUTION e To avoid possible theft do not leave valuables in the storage compartment Always keep the storage com partment covers closed while driving Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage OXM049212 OXM049174N compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot c
66. not change alter or adjust the theft alarm system because it could cause the theft alarm system to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized KIA deal er Malfunctions caused by improper alterations adjustments or modifi cations to the theft alarm system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 38 AM Page 15 P Features of your vehicle DOOR LOCKS eee Unlock l OHM048002L D050100AAM EU Operating door locks from out side the vehicle e Turn the key clockwise to unlock and counterclockwise to lock If you lock the driver s door with a key all vehicle doors will lock automatically e From the driver s door turn the key to the right once to unlock the door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors e Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter e Once the doors are unlocked they may be opened by pulling the door handle e When closing the door push the door by hand Make sure the doors are closed securely x NOTICE e In cold and wet climates door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions e If the door is locked unlocked multi ple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components OXM049006 e To
67. not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels If in doubt consult an author ized KIA dealer To prevent the jack jack handle wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion store them properly XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 06 PM Page 14 What to do in an emergency F070301AUN EU Important use of compact spare tire if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a com pact spare tire This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regu lar size tire This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only When using a compact spare tire observe the following precautions e Under no circumstances should you exceed 80 km h 50 mph a higher speed could damage the tire Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards Any road hazard such as a pothole or debris could seriously damage the compact spare Any continuous road use of this tire A CAUTION e You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in era use The compact spare uld result in tire failure loss of manu should be replaced by the he compact spare should be inflat e control and possible per proper convent
68. oil or for any other purpose If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer e Do not run the engine in an enclosed area Letting the engine idle in your garage even with the garage door open is a hazardous practice Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at Fresh and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary 1 Close all windows 2 Open side vents 3 Set the air intake control at Fresh the air flow control at Floor or Face and the fan at one of the higher speeds To assure proper operation of the ventilation system be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow ice leaves or other obstructions 2 coolant brake fluid and washer fluid XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 3 Driving your vehicle BEFORE DRIVING E0201 00AUN e Be sure that all lights work
69. open the roller blind refer to the following page for instructions on how to use the roller blind To open or close the sunroof manual slide feature pull or push the sunroof control lever backward or forward to the first detent position Pulling the control lever downward also closes the sunroof P To open the sunroof automatically Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the second detent position and then release it The sunroof will slide open all the way automatically To stop the sunroof sliding at any point pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily To close the sunroof automatically Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position and then release it The sunroof will automatically close all the way To stop the sunroof sliding at any point pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily OXM049029 Automatic reversal If an object or part of the body is detect ed while the sunroof is closing automati cally it will reverse the direction and then stop The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it fe Sa ame is XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 32 Features of your vehicle CAUTION e Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail e If yo
70. or stop When towing a trailer the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signals when in fact they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trail er bulbs are still working You must also check the lights every time you discon nect and then reconnect the wires Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle s lighting system Use only an approved trailer wiring har ness An authorized KIA dealer can assist you in installing the wiring harness E140406AFD Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer operate efficiently On a long uphill grade shift down and reduce your speed to around 70 km h 45 mph to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating If your trailer weighs more than the max imum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have an automatic transaxle you should drive in D Drive when tow ing a trailer Operating your vehicle in D Drive when towing a trailer will minimize heat build up and extend the life of your transaxle ENG 5 qxp 12 9 2009 12 00 PM Page 57 P Driving your vehicle A CAUTION e When towing a trailer on steep
71. properly Make sure the front doors are closed completely OXM049223N e The air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents may be weaker than the instrument panel vents because of the long air duct in the front doors Close the air vents in cold weather The air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents may cool a little during heating operation Use the 2nd row outlet vents during cooling operation So am SiS XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 44 AM Page 76 P OXM049142 Mode selection The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the venti lation system Air can be directed to the floor dash board outlets or windshield Six symbols are used to represent MAX A C Face Bi Level Floor Floor Defrost and Defrost air position The MAX A C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster MAX A C Level B D E Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face In this mode the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically Face Level B D E Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face Additionally each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet Bi Level B D E C F G Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor if equipped with 3rd row seating Floor Level C F A D G Most of the air flow is directed to the floor with
72. radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from Bes OXM079007 overflowing into engine parts such as the alternator XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 10 56 AM Page 18 BRAKE CLUTCH IF EQUIPPED FLUID OXM079008 G080100AAM Checking the brake clutch fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri odically The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake clutch fluid clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake clutch fluid contamina tion if equipped If the level is low add fluid to the MAX level The level will fall with accumulated mileage This is a normal condition asso ciated with the wear of the brake linings and or clutch disc if equipped If the fluid level is excessively low have the brake clutch system checked by an authorized KIA dealer Use only the specified brake clutch fluid Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8 Never mix different types of fluid CAUTION Do not allow brake clutch fluid to contact the vehicle s body paint as paint damage will result Brake clutch fluid which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed It should be disposed of properly Don t put in the wrong kind
73. result causing the seat back to lock into the folded down position XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 23 Safety features of your vehicle E 2nd row seat i e TT a ha es La a po OXM039028N B210A01NF 1 When using the rear center seat belt the To release the seat belt Em buckle with the CENTER mark must be The seat belt is released by pressing the used release button 1 on the locking buckle When it is released the belt should auto matically draw back into the retractor If this does not happen check the belt to be sure it is not twisted then try again E tra TA OXM039030 C020105AAM Stowing the rear seat belt The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion when not in use So am Ae iS XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11726 2009 Safety features of your vehicle 11 41 AM Page 24 E 2nd row seat PT FS OXM039031 E 3rd row seat if equipped E OXM039032 Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats After inserting the seat belt tighten the belt webbing by pulling it up A CAUTION Remove the seat belt from the guides before using If you pull on the seat belt when it is stored in the guides it may damage the guides and or belt webbing OED0
74. s window if equipped Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent posi tion 6 completely lowers the driver s window even when the switch is released To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation momentarily pull the switch in the direction opposite of the window s movement XM CAN ENG 4 101 QxXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 23 P Features of your vehicle OXM049015 Auto up down window Driver s window if equipped Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position 6 completely lowers or raises the window even when the switch is released To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation pull up or press down and release the switch If the power window does not operate normally the automatic power window system must be reset as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion 2 Close the drivers window and contin ue pulling up the driver s power win dow switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed Automatic reversal If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement The window will then lower approximately 30 cm 11 8 in to allow the object to be cleared The distance may vary based on the size or position of the window If the wi
75. smart key are similar to the remote keyless entry Lock 1 All doors and tailgate are locked if the lock button is pressed If all doors and tailgate are closed the hazard warning lights will blink and chime sounds once to indicate that all doors and tailgate are locked However if any door or tailgate remains open the hazard warning lights will not operate But if all doors and tailgate are closed after the lock button is pressed the hazard warning lights will blink once D020102AXM EU Unlock 2 The driver s door is unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once The hazard warning lights will blink and chime sounds twice to indicate that the driver s door is unlocked All doors and tailgate are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds The hazard warning lights will blink and chime sounds twice again to indicate that all doors and tail gate are unlocked After pressing this button the doors and tailgate will be locked automatically unless you open any door within 30 sec onds 2 stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the Lock 1 and Unlock 2 button for 4 sec onds disabling 2 stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The hazard warning lights will blink 4 times to indicate that 2 stage unlock was enabled D020104AHM Tailgate unlock 3 The tailgate is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1
76. sure to equip the vehicle with four tires of the same size and type e A full time four wheel drive vehicle cannot be towed by an ordinary tow truck Make sure that the vehicle is placed on a flat bed truck for moving A CAUTION Mud or snow If one of the front or rear wheels begins to spin in mud snow etc the vehicle can sometimes be driv en out by depressing the accelera tor pedal further however avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm because doing so could damage the 4WD system XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 26 Driving your vehicle e Full time 4WD vehicles must be tested on a special four wheel chassis dynamometer NOTICE Never engage the parking brake while performing these tests e A full time 4WD vehicle should not be Temporary free roller tested on a 2WD roll tester If a 2WD Roll tester speedometer roll tester must be used perform the following OXM059025 1 Check the tire pressures recommend ed for your vehicle 2 Place the front wheels on the roll ae tester for a soeedometer test as shown in the illustration 3 Release the parking brake 4 Place the rear wheels on the tempo rary free roller as shown in the illustra tion 5 26 XM CAN ENG 5 gxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 27 Driving your vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM E070100AHM Power brakes Your vehicle has power assisted brakes that adjust automatically through norm
77. the buzzer sounds intermit tently when shifting the gear to the R Reverse position this may indicate a malfunction in the rear parking assist sys tem If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 42 AM Page 62 REARVIEW CAMERA IF EQUIPPED OXM049089N D330000AHM EE The rearview camera will activate when the back up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R Reverse position This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the rearview display mirror while back ing up unless equipped with a navigation system then will display on the screen The rearview camera may be turned off by pressing the ON OFF button when the rearview camera is activated To turn the camera on again press the ON OFF button again when the ignition switch is on and the shift lever in R Reverse Also the camera will turn on automatically whenever the switch is turned off and on again ignition HAZARD WARNING FLASHER OXM049109 D180000AHM The hazard warning flasher should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the vehicle in a hazardous location When you must make such an emer gency stop always pull off the road as far as possible The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch Both turn sign
78. the check at the start of each day s driving Most importantly all hitch nuts and bolts should be tight CAUTION Due to higher load during trailer usage overheating might occur in hot days or during uphill driv ing If the coolant gauge indicates over heating switch off the A C and stop the vehicle in a safe area to cool down the engine When towing check transaxle fluid more frequently XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 5 11 2010 5 53 PM Page 59 Driving your vehicle E140600BFD If you do decide to pull a trailer Here are some important points if you decide to pull a trailer e Consider using a sway control You can ask a hitch dealer about sway control e Do not do any towing with your car dur ing its first 2 000 km 1 200 miles in order to allow the engine to properly break in Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage e When towing a trailer be sure to con sult an authorized KIA dealer for fur b ther information on additional require ments such as a towing kit etc e Always drive your vehicle at a moder ate speed less than 100 km h 60 mph e On a long uphill grade do not exceed 70 km h 45 mph or the posted towing speed limit whichever is lower e The chart contains important consider ations that have to do with weight kg lbs ee bb Gasoline Engine Engine witout system brake witout system Maximum trailer EF S a K a wei
79. the exhaust manifold Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat dam age or mechanical wear Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and that no leaks are present Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage So am eis XM CAN A Genuine KIA air cleaner filter is recom mended when the filter is replaced GO50900AUN Spark plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range G051000AHM Valve clearance if equipped Inspect for excessive valve noise and or engine vibration and adjust if necessary An authorized KIA dealer should perform the operation G051100AHM Cooling system Check the cooling system components such as the radiator coolant reservoir hoses and connections for leakage and damage Replace any damaged parts The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule G051300AUN Manual transaxle fluid if equipped Inspect the manual transaxle fluid according to the maintenance schedule G051400AXM Automatic transaxle fluid if equipped The fluid should be changed at an authorized KIA dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the begin ning of this section x NOTICE Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi cally re
80. the file has no song information 6 SEARCH Knob amp ENTER Button When you rotate the knob clockwise it will display the songs category ahead of the song currently played category in the same level Also when you rotate the knob counter clockwise it will display the songs cate gory before the song currently played category in the same level To listen to the song displayed in the song category press the button to skip to and play the selected song Pressing the button changes the BASS MIDDLE TREBLE FADER and BAL ANCE TUNE mode The mode selected is shown on the display After selecting each mode rotate the Audio control knob clockwise or counterclockwise 7 iPod category Selection Button Moves to the upper category from cur rently played category of the iPod To move to play the category song displayed press TUNE ENTER knob You will be able to search through the lower category of the selected category The order of iPod s category is SONG ALBUMS ARTISTS GENRES and iPod XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page zh Features of your vehicle SIRIUS Satellite Radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS Satellite Radio has over 130 chan nels including 69 channels of 100 com mercial free music plus sports news talk and entertainment available nationwide in your vehicle For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
81. the horn severely to operate it or hit it with your fist Do not press on the horn with a sharp pointed object XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 36 P Features of your vehicle MIRRORS D140100AHM Inside rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen Make this adjustment before you start driving Day L OAM049023 D140101AHM Day night rearview mirror if equipped Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day night lever is in the day position Pull the day night lever toward you to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driv ing Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position D140102AHM EE C1 Electrochromic Mirror ECM if equipped The electric rearview mirror automatical ly controls the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the vehicle and automati cally controls the headlight glare from the vehicles behind you When the engine is running the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror Whenever the shift lever is shifted into reverse R the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehi cle CAUTION Whe
82. this position to drive the vehicle backward A CAUTION Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R Reverse you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R Reverse while the vehicle is in motion except when Rocking the vehicle explained in this section 12 01 PM Page 17 P N Neutral The wheels and transaxle are not engaged The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied D Drive This is the normal forward driving posi tion The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6 gear sequence providing the best fuel economy and power For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades depress the accelerator fully at which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower gear x NOTICE Always come to a complete stop before shifting into D Drive TE A DOWN i OXM059010 Sports mode Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion sports mode is selected by push ing the shift lever from the D Drive posi tion into the manual gate To return to D Drive range operation push the shift lever back into the main gate In sports mode moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly In contrast to a manual transaxle the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed Up Push the lever
83. vehicle OUN036087 e Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact In this case inflated air bags would not be able to provide any addi tional benefit L 0vQ036018N e Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions because occupants move to the direction of the collision and thus in side impacts frontal air bag deployment would not provide addi tional occupant protection However if equipped with side impact and curtain air bags the air bags may inflate depending on the intensity vehi cle speed and angles of impact 1VQA2089 e In an angled collision the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional bene fit and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags ee XM CAN ENG 3 0 11726 2009 afety features of your vehicle 1VQA2090 e Just before impact drivers often brake heavily Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to ride under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance Air bags may not inflate in this under ride situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be signifi cantly reduced by such under ride collisions 11 43 AM Page 62 1VQA2091 e Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because front air bag deploymen
84. 0 to 990 miles OXM049065C Average fuel consumption 1 100 km or MPG This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average con sumption reset The total fuel used is cal culated from the fuel consumption input For an accurate calculation drive more than 50 m 0 03 miles Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second when the average fuel con sumption is being displayed clears the average fuel consumption to zero If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km h 1 6 MPH after refueled more than 6 7 1 6 gallons the average fuel consumption will be cleared to zero x NOTICE e If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupt ed the Distance to empty function may not operate correctly The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters 1 6 gallons of fuel are added to the vehi cle e The fuel consumption and distance to empty values may vary significantly based on driving conditions driving habits and condition of the vehicle e The distance to empty value is an esti mate of the available driving distance This value may differ from the actual driving distance available Sam is XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 50 P Features of your vehicle OXM049067C Average speed km h or MPH This mode calculates the average speed of the vehicle si
85. 02 PM Page 36 Mode Standby Activated Temporarily deactivated OFF Indicator light illuminated blinks illuminated La not illuminated Description Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under 40 km h 25 mph The DBC system will turn ON and enter the standby mode The system does not turn ON if the vehicle speed is over 40 km h 25 mph In the standby mode if the vehicle speed is under 35 km h 22 mph while driving down a steep hill the DBC will activate automatically In the activated mode the DBC will temporarily deacti vate under the following conditions e The hill is not steep enough e The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed If the above conditions are gone the DBC will automat ically activate again The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions e The DBC button is pressed again e The vehicle speed is over 60 km h 38 mph X NOTICE The DBC does not turn ON in the P Park position The DBC may not activate if the ESC or BAS is activated Noise or vibration may occur from the brakes when the DBC is activated The rear stop light comes on when the DBC is activated In a very steep hill even though the brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed the DBC may not deacti vate Always turn OFF the DBC on normal roads The DBC might activate from the standby mode when abrupt corn ing or driving through speed bumps D
86. 0600AAM EU Side impact air bag Your vehicle is equipped with a side impact air bag in each front seat The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle s driver and or the front passen ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone So am iS XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 56 Safety features of your vehicle e The side impact air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions depending on the crash severity angle speed and point of impact e The side impact air bags do not only deploy on the side of the impact but also on the opposite side e Also both sides of the side impact air bags deploy in certain rollover situa tions e The side impact air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 43 AM Page 57 Safety features of your vehicle e The curtain air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact colli sions depending on the crash severity angle speed and point of impact The curtain air bags do not only deploy on the side of the impact but also on the opposite side Also both sides of the curtain air bags deploy in certain rollover situations The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations samy OCM030304 C040700AUN Curtain air bag Curtain air bags are located along both sides of t
87. 1 Drivin our vehicle Continued e When the stop lamp fuse is blown you can t start the engine normally Replace the fuse with a new one If it is not possible you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC position The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine NOTICE A CAUTION gt e If the battery is weak or the smart key Do not press the ENGINE START does not work correctly you can start the engine by inserting the smart key in the smart key holder When you pull out the smart key from the smart key holder press the smart key and pull it out Continued STOP button for more than 10 sec onds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 12 Driving your vehicle MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED gt The shift lever can be moved without pulling the ring 1 the shift lever EQ50000AUN m The ring 1 must be pulled up while moving OXM059026 E050100BUN C1 Manual transaxle operation The manual transaxle has 6 forward gears This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accom plished Press the clutch pedal down fully while shifting then release it slowl
88. 30300 C020200BHM EU Pre tensioner seat belt Your vehicle is equipped with driver s and front passenger s pre tensioner seat belts The purpose of the pre tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant s body in certain frontal collisions or side collisions or rollovers The pre tensioner seat belts can be activated where the frontal colli sion or side collisions or rollovers is severe enough together with the air bags XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 25 Safety features of your vehicle When the vehicle stops suddenly or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly the seat belt retractor will lock into position In certain frontal collisions or side collisions or rollovers the pre tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occu pant s body If the system senses excessive seat belt tension on the driver or passenger s seat belt when the pre tensioner activates the load limiter inside the pre tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt x NOTICE The pre tensioner will activate not only in a frontal collision but also in a side collision or rollover if the vehicle is equipped with a side or curtain air bag 8KMB3311 The seat belt pre tensioner system con sists mainly of the following components Their locations are shown in the illustra tion 1 SRS air bag warning light 2 Retr
89. 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 22 P Features of your vehicle D080100AAM Power windows The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate Each door has a power window switch that controls the door s window The driv er has a power window lock button which can block the operation of passenger windows The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position However if the front doors are opened the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period NOTICE While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof if equipped in an open or partially open position your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the fol lowing actions If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down partially lower both front windows approximately one inch If you experi ence the noise with the sunroof open slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening OXM049016 D080101AUN Window opening and closing The drivers door has a master power window switch that controls all the win dows in the vehicle To open or close a window press down or pull up the front portion of the corre sponding switch to the first detent posi tion 5 OXM049017 D080102AAM Auto down window Driver
90. 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 47 AM Page 88 P E Type B OXM049159 Air intake control This is used to select the outside fresh air position or recirculated air position To change the air intake control position push the control button Recirculated air position With the recirculated air position selected air from the passenger compart ment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected Outside fresh air position m Type A With the outside fresh air position selected air enters the vehicle from out side and is heated or cooled according to the function selected x NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position without air conditioning selected may cause fog ging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger com partment may become stale In addition prolonged use of the air con ditioning with the recirculated air posi tion selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 47 AM Page 89 Features of your vehicle Py J j OXM049160 Fan speed control The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by operating the fan speed control switch To change the fan speed press the switch for higher speed or push V
91. 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 51 Features of your vehicle D150300AAM Warnings and indicators All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON do not start the engine Any light that does not illuminate should be checked by an authorized KIA dealer After starting the engine check to make sure that all warning lights are off If any warning lights are still on this indicates a situation that needs attention When releasing the parking brake the brake system warning light should go off The fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel level is low D150301AXM EU ECOMINDER indicator ECO if equipped The ECOMINDER indicator is a system that illuminates ECO when the driver has reached optimum fuel efficiency e The ECOMINDER indicator will turn the ECO light green on the instrument panel when you are driving fuel effi ciently in the ECO ON mode If you don t want the indicator dis played you can turn the ECO ON mode to OFF mode by pressing the TRIP button For ECO ON OFF Mode operation please refer to the previous page Fuel efficient driving can be influenced by driving habits and road conditions e The indicator will not display while in P Park N Neutral or R Reverse XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 52 P Features of your vehicle D150302AUN Air bag warning light es ry This warning light will illuminate for approximatel
92. 49 AM Page 97 Features of your vehicle OXM049183 Sunvisor Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows To use the sunvisor pull it downward To use the sunvisor for the side window pull it downward unsnap it from the bracket 1 and swing it to the side 2 Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward 3 To use the vanity mirror pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover 4 The ticket holder 5 is provided for hold ing a tollgate ticket if equipped The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehicle may differ from the illustration N CAUTION Vanity mirror lamp if equipped If you use the vanity mirror lamp turn off the lamp before returning the sunvisor to its original position otherwise it could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage E Front D280500AEN Power outlet if equipped The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 49 AM Page 98 Features of your vehicle J CAUTION P Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use Using the accessory plug for pro longed periods of time with the engine off could cause the bat tery to discharge Only use 12V electric acces
93. 5 E Cooling fluid see engine coolant E ee E 7 15 Crankcase emission control system a E E E E T Cruise control system ea E E E NEE E EEE 5 39 Electric on vate ECM ee 4 36 Cup holder ee Te eT er rere eee ee ee eee 4 96 Curtain air bag AeticeaataenesaessuseiNetedsneniGensstecdteeesteneneawensannes 3 57 113 XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 4 Index Emergency starting ssssessesesseseeseeeseeneseeneneeneneeeeaes 6 4 FL Jump starting POePTTeTETESTeeeTeTerereeeerererereeeerrereeeer errr errr eee rire 6 4 Push starting T E A A 6 5 Flat nb oan 6 7 Emergency tailgate safety release 2s essen ste aserecee 4 20 Changing tires vse eeeeeseeseeteseeeseeseeteenenes 6 9 Fmercency Oh al eee ec Sera 6 17 Compact spare Tipe 2st seesteneeesnendent anes ina aeaa 6 14 Emergency while driving eee 6 2 Jack and tools ccsrrsssteceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeesesessessesessecenseesesones 6 7 Emission control SS Ue cee ce 7 60 Removing and storing the spare tire crrcecec etc e ec eee eee eee eens 6 8 Crankcase emission control system e 7 60 Floor mat anchor s sss ee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 4 99 Evaporative emission control including ORVR Fluid System 4 esis aco e eidi0 wien ele eisin piecele 6 6 ere ole Sye s E a eo sidie ce sisi 0 sieiein s sie wee _ Brake clutch fluid eines desist bonsese desc A majeadnaat EEE 7 18 Exhaust emission control system srt trrtrtrretrrrree 7 61 Power steering fluid s ssssssssssesseseseeesseeseeeseeseeen 7 19 Engin
94. 6 7 Double check that the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor If you cannot the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode To remove the child restraint press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully Safety features of your vehicle When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position the retractor will automatically switch from the Auto Lock mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage fe So am Seis oll XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 36 Safety features of your vehicle OXM039033 C030103AEN 1 Route the child restraint seat strap lt p Securing a child restraint seat with over the seatback tether anchor system For vehicles with adjustable head Child restraint hook holders are located rests route the tether strap under the on the back of the rear seatbacks headrest and between the headrest posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback 2 Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 37 Safety features of your vehicle Lower Anchor Position Indicator OXM039035 C030104AHM EU Child restraint symbols are
95. B PA710XM USA CANADA SIRIUSA Buetooth 1 AUX USB Selection Button 2 TRACK Selection Button 3 RANDOM Playback Button INFO 4 REPEAT Selection Button b SETUP 5 SCAN Selection Button b 6 INFO Button F 7 7 SEARCH Knob amp ENTER Button PA NTARE EFAA 8 FOLDER Moving Button E POWER ENTER naO 1 2 3 XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page mad Features of your vehicle A CAUTION IN USING USB DEVICE To use an external USB device make sure the device is not con nected when starting up the vehi cle Connect the device after starting the vehicle If you start the engine when the USB device is connected it may damage the USB device USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected the external USB device may not work It may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files 1 It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8 Kbps 320 Kbps 2 It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8 Kbps 320 Kbps Take precautions for static elec tricity when connecting or dis connecting the external USB device Continued Continued An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable Depending on the condition of the external USB device the con nected external USB device can be unrecognizable When the formatted byte s
96. BC may activate and cause the engine to stop in vehicles with manual transaxle if you drive in 3rd gear or above with DBC on Do not turn on DBC when driving in 3rd gear or above XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 37 P Driving your vehicle E070600AAM Good braking practices Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away Driving through water may get the brakes wet They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed Wet brakes can be dangerous Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side To dry the brakes apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times If the braking action does not return to normal stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized KIA dealer for assis tance Don t coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear This is extremely haz ardous Keep the vehicle in gear at all times use the brakes to slow down then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed Don t ride the brake pedal Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driv ing can be dangerous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effectiveness It also increases the wear of the brake components If a tire goes flat while you
97. CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 8 Index Shift lock system A E A A E A E E T ele 5 18 Storage compartment EE EE E E T E E E E EAT 4 94 Side impact air bag Tr eee Te Cre Te ree re re ere eee 3 55 Center console storage OT ee ee TEE Tee Tee eT ee 4 94 Spare tire Glove box So E E biG E E ei e aia 0 070 e ie e e sia1e 6 0 sie e s ti 4 94 Compact spare E sect Some asta otias baciendies Sqnsouedean coc eirio 6 14 Luggage Ney ee 4 95 Compact spare tire replacement Cre rrr rere er 7 37 Sunglass holder eT eT Tr ee ee ee ee 4 95 Removing and storing the spare tire PEERAA E T EA EES 6 8 Summer tires EA E E E E T E I E EA E wie 7 44 Smart key re E ee ee ee eee 4 9 Sunglass holder ce ee ere ee ee re 4 95 Smooth cornering E E sed neers A A A vse teal 5 47 aa ee 4 30 SW ee ct tesieni inii na 5 50 7 44 a A oes T 4 97 Special driving conditions eT er er ee 5 45 Driving at night treet ester t eee tee tees e te tseteeeeeeeees 5 47 T Driving in flooded Areggerrrereererrereeeeeereereeeeeceeseeseeeeeee 5 48 Driving in the rain ee ee re ee ee ee 5 48 Tachometer err er rT Tee Ce Te eee ee Tee cre ee re eer reer 4 45 Hazardous driving conditions Terrie te ee er ree 5 45 Tailgate a E E 4 19 Highway driving uraa E E E E o s 6 5 49 Emergency tailgate safety release T A E E E 4 20 Rocking the vehicleseeeeeeeeessereresseeseseeeseseeeseseeeseseeesesee 5 46 Tether anchor system E E E E E E E 3 36 Smooth cornering Se re E T 5 47 Theft alarm system Oaa a E a
98. CAN ENG 1 QXP 11 26 2009 11 33 AM Page 1 Introduction How to use this manual 1 2 Fuel requirements 1 3 Vehicle handling instructions 1 5 Vehicle break in process 1 5 Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster 1 6 XM CAN ENG 1 QXP 11 26 2009 Introduction 11 33 AM Page 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A010000AAM We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehi cle Your Owner s Manual can assist you in many ways We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual In order to minimize the chance of death or injury you must read the WARNING and CAU TION sections in the manual Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle By reading your manual you will learn about features important safety information and driving tips under vari ous road conditions The general layout of the manual is pro vided in the Table of Contents Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual Sections This manual has eight sections plus an index Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want You will find various WARNINGs CAUTIONs and NOTICEs in this manu al These WARNINGs were prepared to enhance your personal safety You should carefully read and follow ALL p
99. DE OPEN open the roller blind SLIDE CLOSE A CAUTION Then release the lever Operation of the roller blind without using the handle 1 may cause mis alignment or malfunction When this is complete the sunroof sys tem has been reset NOTICE It is normal for wrinkles to form on the blind because of its material character istic XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 34 P Features of your vehicle STEERING WHEEL D130100AHM EU U1 Power steering Power steering uses energy from the engine to assist you in steering the vehi cle If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative the vehicle may still be steered but it will require increased steering effort Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation have the power steer ing checked by an authorized KIA dealer A CAUTION Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for more than 5 seconds with the engine running Holding the steering wheel for more than 5 seconds in either position may cause damage to the power steering pump x NOTICE If the power steering drive belt breaks or if the power steering pump malfunc tions steering effort will greatly increase x NOTICE If the vehicle is parked for extended periods outside in cold weather below 10 C 14 F the power steering may require increased effort when the engine is first st
100. E oti 4 13 Speedometer E r E T A T E A T T 4 45 Third 3rd row air conditioning E a T 4 79 Sports mode tttrtrtettettrttrtettrttrtrtettrttrterterertertertet etenee 5 17 Tilt steering eeeeseeeseeseseseseseseteseneneeenenenenenenenenenenenenens 4 34 Starting difficulties see Engine will not start e 6 3 Tire and loading information labels sre vsenevenrenses 5 62 Starting the engine Pee ee ee eee ee ee 5 5 Tire specification and pressure label E E E eens 8 8 Steering wheel er ee ee er ee ee er er ee 4 34 Tires and wheels ee re re Te rT re 7 32 3 Horn eee ee ee eT ree eer re re ee 4 35 All season tires seu E E EE E E E E 7 44 Power Steering eeeeteeeeteeeeetertetertererterestertrtertetereets 4 34 Checking tire inflation pressure tetetete 7233 Tilt steering E tenis tanntened Mennateusiiwnenerweneeneneewanaanes 4 34 Compact spare tire replacement rere ee ET 7 37 Steering wheel audio control etree A 102 Radial ply tires rete ttt tenets 7 44 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures eseese 7 32 Snow tires E E ts 6 ae Cuwe Ves sods sleewesice ee ascutle tes hedseueoues eee 7 44 1 8 XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 9 Index Summer tires E EEE E E A E E sos 7 44 Vehicle handling instructions E E ease ews 1 5 Tire care en ainni oriei Rei 739 Vehicle identification number VIN sree Q_7 Tire maintenance ince RaiseduenesSesnaueceiiaceteeeatieeasaseraseeasaoaas 7 37 Vehicle load limit UE TE E EE E E ETE EE
101. EE D O CT A A ER XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 5 27 2010 5 50 PM Page 8 p Maintenance Chassis and body MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months whichever comes first INTERVALS apie OONAN 128 ITEM Air conditioner compressor operation a refrigerant amount Climate control air filter Exhaust pipes heat sil amp mountinos EER E Front suspension ball joints i i Rear differential fluid 4WD nn E E E O M L2 Brakes clutch fluid 1 EE Eo heheh Hf Hs i R Front brake pads amp discs 3 Eo Eo EE EE EE EE Eo Ei Rear brake pads amp discs drums 3 an hh ta EE st Paring brake E E e eE MDMEM Brake lines amp connections ae A Manual transaxle oil 1 HHH H H 6h n Clutch amp brake pedal free play EE it il hi a Eg Propeller shaft SST EE Et if equipped xm xo XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 9 Maintenance Chassis and body Continued MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months whichever comes first INTERVALS f ANTENEN Be EE Be ee El ee ITEM fons a e 6 20 2a 28 02 26 20 2a ae 82 s6 oo 64 a eee eo Chassis amp underbody bolts amp nuts En EE EE EE Tire condition amp inflation pressure ee H Wheel alignment 4 Inspect when abnormal condition noted Tire rotation Rotate the tires every 12 000 km zane conga amp sue Bh wg aii nH ane ower steering fluid amp lines E TE E E m o Driveshaft dust boots e a A
102. MUTE Button When the button is pressed stops sound and Audio Mute is displayed on LCD 6 Preset Selection Button e Press 1 6 buttons less than 0 8 sec onds to play the station saved in each button e Press 1 6 button more than 0 8 sec onds or longer to save the current sta tion to the respective button with a beep 7 TUNE Knob amp Audio Control Knob e Rotate the knob clockwise or counter clock wise to increase or decrease from current frequency AM 10 kHz FM 200 kHz Pressing the button changes the BASS MIDDLE TREBLE FADER and BAL ANCE TUNE mode The mode selected is shown on the display After selecting each mode rotate the Audio control knob clockwise or counterclockwise e BASS Control To increase the BASS rotate the knob clockwise while to decrease the BASS rotate the knob counterclockwise e MIDDLE Control To increase the MIDDLE rotate the knob clockwise while to decrease the MID DLE rotate the knob counterclockwise e TREBLE Control To increase the TREBLE rotate the knob clockwise while to decrease the TRE BLE rotate the knob counterclockwise Sam iS XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page aa Features of your vehicle e FADER Control Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize rear speaker sound front speaker sound will be attenuated When the control knob is turned counterclock wise front speaker sound will be empha size
103. N ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 44 AM Page 74 Features of your vehicle MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED E Front climate control 1 Fan speed control knob 2 Mode selection knob 3 Temperature control knob 4 Air conditioning button 5 Air intake control button 6 3rd row air conditioning ON OFF button controlled from the front 7 3rd row air conditioning fan speed control switch 8 Ticket holder if equipped The actual control panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OXM049140 OXM049141 XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 44 AM Page 75 P Features of your vehicle Heating and air conditioning 1 2 Start the engine Set the mode to the desired position For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling Heating Na Cooling ee Set the temperature control to the desired position Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position if equipped Set the fan speed control to the desired speed If air conditioning is desired turn the air conditioning system if equipped on if equipped with 3rd row seating X 2nd row outlet vents E The air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents is controlled by the front climate control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the front doors If the door is open or not closed completely the air flow of the 2nd row outlet vent is not delivered
104. OFF button while driving on a flat road surface x NOTICE e When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer ensure that the ESC is turned off ESC OFF light illuminat ed If the ESC is left on it may pre vent the vehicle speed from increas ing and result in false diagnosis Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system operation Hill start assist control HAC if equipped A vehicle has the tendency to roll back on a steep hill when it starts to go after stopping The Hill start Assist Control HAC prevents the vehicle from rolling back by applying the brakes automatical ly for about 2 seconds The brakes are released when the accelerator pedal is depressed or after about 2 seconds x NOTICE e The HAC does not operate when the transaxle shift lever is in the P Park or N Neutral position e The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned i A OXM059018 Downhill brake control DBC if equipped The Downhill Brake Control DBC sup ports the driver driving down a steep hill without the driver depressing the brake pedal It slows down the vehicle under 8 km h 5 mph and lets the driver concen trate on steering the vehicle DBC defaults to the OFF position when ever the ignition is turned on The DBC can be turned on or off by pushing the button ft So am a iS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp Drivin 11 26 2009 our vehicle 12
105. ON OFF button the CRUISE indicator light in the instru ment cluster will go off e Turn the ignition off Both of these actions will cancel the cruise control operation If you want to resume the cruise control operation repeat the steps provided in To set cruise control speed on the previous page XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 43 P Driving your vehicle ECONOMICAL OPERATION E100000AHM EU Your vehicle s fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving where you drive and when you drive Each of these factors affects how many kilometers miles you can get from a liter gallon of fuel To operate your vehicle as economically as possible use the fol lowing driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs e Drive smoothly Accelerate at a moder ate rate Don t make jack rabbit starts or full throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed Don t race between stoplights Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don t have to change speeds unnecessarily Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnec essary braking This also reduces brake wear e Drive at a moderate speed The faster you drive the more fuel your vehicle uses Driving at a moderate speed especially on the highway is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel con sumption Don t ride the brake pedal This c
106. P Park or N Neutral into R Reverse 1 Depress and hold the brake pedal 2 Start the engine or turn the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Move the shift lever If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P Park position a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard It is a normal condition OXM059011N Shift lock override If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P Park or N Neutral position into R Reverse position with the brake pedal depressed continue depressing the brake then do the following 1 Carefully remove the cap covering the shift lock access hole 1 2 Insert a key or screwdriver into the access hole and press down on the key or screwdriver 3 Move the shift lever 4 Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized KIA dealer immediately XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 19 P Driving your vehicle E060103AHM Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P Park position Even if the ignition switch is in the LOCK position the key also cannot be removed If your vehicle is equipped with ENGINE START STOP button the button will not change to the OFF position unless the shift lever is in the P Park position EO60200AAM Good driving practices Never move the gear shift lever from P Park or N Neutral to any other posi tion w
107. PM Page 17 What to do in an emergenc CAUTION e Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause dam age to the vehicle e Do not tow with sling type equip ment Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment OUN046030 OCM054034 When towing your vehicle in an emer gency without wheel dollies 1 Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi tion 2 Place the transaxle shift lever in N Neutral 3 Release the parking brake A CAUTION Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N Neutral may cause inter nal damage to the transaxle OXMO069008N FO80300AHM EU Emergency towing If towing is necessary have it done by an authorized KIA dealer or a com mercial tow truck service So am iS XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 What to do in an emergency If towing service is not available in an emergency your vehicle may be tem porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front or rear of the vehicle Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes Towing in this manner may be done only on hard surfaced roads for a short dis tance and at low speeds Also the wheels axles power train steering and brakes must all be in good condition e Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi cle out of mud sand or other condi tions from which the vehicl
108. PM Page 67 P Driving your vehicle VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY E160000AUN This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the fol lowing terms for determining your vehi cle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s specifications and the certification label E160100AUN Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equip ment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment E160200AUN Vehicle curb weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment E160300AUN Cargo weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment E160400AUN GAW Gross axle weight This is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload E160500AUN GAWR Gross axle weight rating This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the certification label The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR E160600AUN GVW Gro
109. RESET button is pressed for less than 0 8 seconds it will work as follows in each mode RADIO mode It will function as the PRESET STATION buttons CD USB iPod mode It will function as TRACK UP DOWN but ton D300202AEN MODE 3 Press the button to change audio source FM 1 2 AM SAT 1 3 CD USB AUX iPod FM D300205AHM MUTE 4 e Press the button to mute the sound e Press the button to turn off the micro phone during a telephone call Detailed information for audio control buttons are described in the following pages in this section ne Features of your vehicle XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page eh Oh AUX iPod USB OXM049195N D300600AHM EE Aux USB and iPod port if equipped If your vehicle has an aux and or USB universal serial bus port or iPod port you can use an aux port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod port to plug in an iPod x NOTICE When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet noise may occur during playback If this happens use the power source of the portable audio device iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc FM reception LONOSPHERE JBMo01 D300800AHM How vehicle audio works AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle This signal is then received
110. RT STOP button is in the ACC or ON position if any door is open the system checks for the smart key If the smart key is not in the vehicle the indicator will blink and if all doors are closed the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds The indicator will go off while the vehicle is moving Keep the smart key in the vehicle or insert it in the smart key holder 4WD system warning light if equipped ny When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the 4WD indicator will illu minate and then go off in a few seconds If the 4WD system warning light illuminates this indicates that there is a malfunction in the 4WD system If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possi ble 4WD LOCK indicator try if equipped ry LOCK The 4WD LOCK indicator light is illumi nated when the 4WD LOCK button is pushed The purpose of this 4WD LOCK mode is to increase the drive power when driving on dry road surfaces wet pavement snow covered roads and or off road The 4WD LOCK indicator light is turned off by pushing the button again A CAUTION Do not use 4WD LOCK mode on dry paved roads or highway it can cause noise vibration or damage of 4WD related parts XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 42 AM Page 59 Features of your vehicle REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Sensors OXM049083N E OXM049084N The rear parking assist system assists
111. When not securing a child restraint the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver s seat belt Emergency Locking Retractor Type It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system the seat belt oper ation changes to allow the belt to retract but not to extend Automatic Locking Retractor Type Refer to Using a child restraint system in this section x NOTICE Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes have the seated passengers use the emergency locking feature for improved conven ience The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation To convert from the auto matic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract A CAUTION Do NOT fold down the left portion of the rear seat back when the rear center seat belt is buckled ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt before folding down the left portion of the rear seat back If the rear center seat belt is buckled when the left portion of the rear seat back is folded down distortion and damage to the top portion of the seat back and seat belt garnish may
112. a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several years When replacement is necessary use the following procedure 1 Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen tly pry open the transmitter center cover 2 Replace the battery with a new battery CR2032 When replacing the battery make sure the battery positive sym bol faces up as indicated in the illus tration 3 Install the battery in the reverse order of removal For transmitter replacement see an authorized KIA dealer to reprogram the transmitter So am SiS P XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 8 Features of your vehicle J CAUTION e The keyless entry system trans mitter is designed to give you years of trouble free use howev er it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery contact an authorized KIA dealer Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunc tion Be sure to use the correct battery To avoid damaging the transmit ter don t drop it get it wet or ee expose it to heat or sunlight XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 9 P Features of your vehicle SMART KEY IF EQUIPPED OXM049004 D040000AXM With a smart key you can lock or unlock a door and tailgate and even start the engine without inserting the key The functions of the buttons on a
113. actor pre tensioner assembly 3 SRS control module XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 26 Safety features of your vehicle x NOTICE Both the driver s and front passen ger s pre tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal collisions The pre tensioners will not be activat ed if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision When the pre tensioner seat belts are activated a loud noise may be heard and fine dust which may appear to be smoke may be visible in the passenger compartment These are normal oper ating conditions and are not haz ardous Although it is harmless the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged peri ods Wash all exposed skin areas thor oughly after an accident in which the pre tensioner seat belts were activat ed x NOTICE Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre tensioner seat belt the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position and then it should turn off CAUTION If the pre tensioner seat belt is not working properly this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it remains illuminated after illuminatin
114. age the related parts or make it work irregularly eS am a SiS XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 4 Specifications amp Consumer information RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability use only lubricants of the proper quality The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle Lubricant Volume Classification Engine oil 2 4 Engine 4 6 1 4 86 US qt API Service SM drain and refill 3 5 Engine 5 2 1 5 49 US at ILSAC GF 4 or above Manual transaxle fluid 2 4 Engine 1 8 7 1 90 US at API GL 4 SAE 75W 85 MICHANG ATF SP IV 2 4 Engine 7 1 1 7 50 US qt SK ATE SP IV Automatic transaxle fluid NOCA ATF SP IV 3 5 Engine 7 8 1 8 24 US qt KIA genuine ATF SP IV yea 6 5 6 87 US at T jetted wn Coolant ngine aT 6 61 6 97 US at ming ix re an i an i j wa o 35 Engine AT 8 6 1 9 09 US at Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator 5 MT Manual transaxle gt XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 5 Specifications amp Consumer information Lubricant Volume Classification Brake fluid 0 7 0 8 0 7 0 8 US qt FMVSS116 DOT 3 or DOT 4 a HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL 5 SAE 75W 90 Rear differential oil 4WD 0 7 1 0 74 US qt SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent Transfe
115. age them J CAUTION When cleaning leather products steering wheel seats etc use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid alkaline detergents the color of the leather may fade or the sur face may get stripped off G230202AUN Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner Clean with a mild soap solution recom mended for upholstery or carpets Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected Also its fire resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained CAUTION Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric s appearance and fire resistant properties G230203AUN Cleaning the lap shoulder belt web bing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Follow the instruc tions provided with the soap Do not bleach or re dye the webbing because this may weaken it G230204AHM Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi cle become fogged that is covered with an oily greasy
116. ake or park ing brake to hold the car on an incline Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly During cold weather shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle e If you ve come to a complete stop and it s hard to shift into 1st or R Reverse put the shift lever in N Neutral posi tion and release the clutch Press the clutch pedal back down and then shift into 1st or R Reverse gear position A CAUTION e To avoid premature clutch wear and damage do not drive with pedal Also don t use the clutch to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill grade while waiting for a traffic light etc Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks Downshifting When you must slow down in heavy traf fic or while driving up steep hills down shift before the engine starts to labor Downshifting reduces the chance of Stalling and gives better acceleration when you again need to increase your speed When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life fe So am iS E050102AUN ap XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 E050200AUN C1 Good driving practices Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill This is extremely hazardous Always leave the vehicle in gear Don t ride the
117. ake the daytime running lights turn OFF when 1 The headlight switch is ON 2 The parking brake is applied 3 Engine stops XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 42 AM Page 68 Features of your vehicle WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield wiper washer Rear window wiper washer A Wiper speed control if equipped MIST Single wipe l OFF Off INT Intermittent wipe LO Low wiper speed HI High wiper speed B Intermittent wipe time adjustment C Wash with brief wipes front D Rear wiper control ON Continuous wipe OFF Off OAM049100L OXM049237N D200000AAM EE E Wash with brief wipes rear XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 OYF049102 D200100AAM Front windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON MIST For a single wiping cycle push the lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held OFF Wiper is not in operation INT Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals Use this mode in light rain or mist To vary the speed setting turn the speed control knob 1 LO Normal wiper speed HI Fast wiper speed 10 43 AM Page 69 P x NOTICE If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes or until the snow and or ice is removed
118. al usage In the event that the power assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you nor mally would The stopping distance how ever will be longer When the engine is not running the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted Pump the brake pedal only when neces sary to maintain steering control on slip pery surfaces E070101AUN In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake The stopping distance however will be much greater than normal XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 28 P Driving your vehicle E070102AHM Disc brakes wear indicator When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal Please remember that some driving con ditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply or lightly apply the brakes This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes A CAUTION e To avoid costly brake repairs do not continue to drive with worn brake pads
119. al lights will blink The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition switch To turn the hazard warning lights off push the switch again XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 42 AM Page 63 P Features of your vehicle LIGHTING D190100APB Battery saver function e The purpose of this feature is to pre vent the battery from being discharged if the lights are left in the ON position The system automatically shuts off the parking lights 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed and the driver s door is opened and closed e With this feature the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at night and opens the driver s side door If necessary to keep the parking lights on when the ignition key is removed perform the following 1 Open the driver side door 2 Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column D190200AHM EU Headlight escort function if equipped The headlights and taillights remain on for approximately 20 minutes after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position However if the drivers door is opened and closed the headlights and taillights are turned off after 30 seconds The headlights and taillights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the transmitter or turning off the light switch from the headlight or Auto light position
120. ally change to the DUAL mode as well 2 Operate the left temperature control to adjust the driver side temperature Operate the right temperature control to adjust the passenger side tempera ture When the driver side temperature is set to the highest HI or lowest Lo temper ature setting the DUAL mode is deacti vated for maximum heating or cooling Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally 1 Press the DUAL button again to deac tivate DUAL mode The passenger side temperature will be set to the same temperature as the driver side 2 Operate the driver side temperature control switch The driver and passen ger side temperature will be adjusted equally Temperature conversion You can switch the temperature mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows While pressing the MODE button press the DUAL button for 3 seconds or more The display will change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit or from Fahrenheit to Centigrade If the battery has been discharged or dis connected the temperature mode dis play will reset to Centigrade OXM049158 Outside thermometer The current outside temperature is dis played in 1 C 1 F increments The tem perature range is between 40 C 60 C 40 F 140 F e The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP
121. an increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components In addition driving with your foot rest ing on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences Take care of your tires Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure Incorrect inflation either too much or too little results in unnecessary tire wear Check the tire pressures at least once a month Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces Poor align ment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption Keep your vehicle in good condition For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs maintain your vehi cle in accordance with the mainte nance schedule in section 7 If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions more frequent maintenance is required see section 7 for details Keep your vehicle clean For maximum service your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials It is especially important that mud dirt ice etc not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion Travel lightly Don t carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle Weight reduces fuel economy Don t let the engine idle longe
122. and do not indicate radio trouble Fading As your vehicle moves away from the radio station the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade When this occurs we suggest that you select another stronger station Flutter Static Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the trans mitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering nois es to occur Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the distur bance clears Station 2 JBMO005 e Station Swapping As a FM signal weakens another more powerful sig nal near the same frequency may begin to play This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clear est signal If this occurs select another station with a stronger signal Multi Path Cancellation Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering This can be caused by a direct and reflect ed signal from the same station or by signals from two stations with close frequencies If this occurs select another station until the condition has passed So am SiS XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio gxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page eh Features of your vehicle Satellite radio reception You may experience difficulties in receiv ing SIRIUS satellite radio signals in the following situations SATELITE1 If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov ered parking area If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi lev
123. and re insert it fully OXM079004N G060100AHM EU Checking the engine oil level 1 Be sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature 5 Pull the dipstick out again and check the level The level should be between F and L CAUTION Do not overfill the engine oil It may damage the engine j sA A OxM079005N If it is near or at L add enough oil to bring the level to F Do not overfill Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components Use only the specified engine oil Refer to Recommended lubricants and capaci ties in section 8 XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 15 Maintenance ENGINE COOLANT G060200BHM G0O70000AHM Changing the engine oil and filter The high pressure cooling system has a Have engine oil and filter changed by an reservoir filled with year round antifreeze authorized KIA dealer according to the coolant The reservoir is filled at the fac Maintenance Schedule at the beginning t0 l l of this section Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year at the beginning of the winter season and before traveling to a colder climate G070100AHM Checking the coolant level XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 10 56 AM Page 16 j r fi i F Ti f i r fF al S sa r i VA A OXM079006 C
124. and side win dow defrosters j i wi Floor Defrost Level Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters ene XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 46 AM Page 86 P Features of your vehicle OXM049155 Defrost Level Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters OXM049145 Instrument panel vents The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel if equipped Also you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown OXM049156 Temperature control The temperature will increase to the maximum HI by turning the knob to the extreme right The temperature will decrease to the minimum Lo by turning the knob to the extreme left When turning the knob the temperature will increase or decrease by 0 5 C 1 When set to the lowest temperature set ting the air conditioning will operate con tinuously XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 47 AM Page 87 P Features of your vehicle OXM049157 Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually 1 Press the DUAL button to operate the driver and passenger side temperature individually Also if the passenger side temperature control switch is operat ed it will automatic
125. any chemical cleaner or polish Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label G230102BUN Finish maintenance Washing To help protect your vehicle s finish from rust and deterioration wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water If you use your vehicle for off road driv ing you should wash it after each off road trip Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt dirt mud and other foreign materials Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean Insects tar tree sap bird droppings industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle s finish if not removed immediately Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits A mild soap safe for use on painted surfaces may be used After washing rinse the vehicle thor oughly with lukewarm or cold water Do not allow soap to dry on the finish CAUTION Do not use strong soap chemical detergents or hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle Especailly with high pressure water Water may leak through the windows and wet the interior To prevent damage to the plastic parts do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010
126. ap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible Check if the belt fits periodically A child s squirming could put the belt out of position Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat If a larger child over age 12 must be seat ed in the front seat the child should be securely restrained by the available lap shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch es the child s neck or face try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 29 Safety features of your vehicle C020302AKM Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wear lap shoul der belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE C020303AUN Injured person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported When this is necessary you should con sult a physi
127. are driving apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down When you are moving Slowly enough for it to be safe to do so pull off the road and stop in a safe place fe So am SiS XM CAN Driving your vehicle ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 e If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle don t let your vehi cle creep forward To avoid creeping forward keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped Be cautious when parking on a hill Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P automatic transaxle or in first or reverse gear manual transaxle If your vehicle is facing downhill turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling If your vehicle is facing uphill turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling block the wheels 12 02 PM Page 38 P Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged posi tion This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P automatic transaxle or in first or reverse gear manual transaxle and block the rear wheels so the ve
128. are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery contact an authorized KIA deal er 10 38 AM Page 12 _ 6 P Pry open the rear cover of the smart key Replace the battery with a new battery CR2032 When replacing the battery make sure the battery positive sym bol faces up as indicated in the illus tration Install the battery in the reverse order of removal NOTICE Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction Be sure to use the correct battery Circuits inside the smart key may develop problems when dropped exposed to moisture or static electrici ty If you suspect that your smart key might have sustained some damage or you feel your smart key is not working correctly contact an author ized KIA dealer XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 38 AM Page 13 P Features of your vehicle THEFT ALARM SYSTEM Disarmed stage D030000AEN This system is designed to provide pro tection from unauthorized entry into the car This system is operated in three stages the first is the Armed stage the second is the Theft alarm stage and the third is the Disarmed stage If trig gered the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights D030100AEN EU Armed stage Park the car and stop the engine Arm the system as described below 1 Remove the ignition key from the igni tion swit
129. ars on the screen as fol lows Input operation example 1 Say Nine nine five Display 995 2 And say Seven three four Display 995734 e Adding Entry by Phone 1 Press button 2 Say Phonebook 3 Say Add Entry after prompt 4 Say By Phone to proceed 5 Say Yes to confirm 6 Your phone will start to transfer phone contact list to the audio system This process may take over 10 minutes depending on the phone model and number of entries 7 Wait until the audio displays Transfer Complete message e Changing Name The registered names can be modified 1 Press button 2 Say Phonebook 3 Say Change Name after prompt 4 Say the name of the entry voice tag 5 Say Yes to confirm 6 Say new desired name e Deleting Name The registered names can be deleted 1 Press button 2 Say Phonebook 3 Say Delete Name after prompt 4 Say the name of the entry voice tag 5 Say Yes to confirm m Making a Phone Call e Calling by Name A phone call can be made by speaking names registered in the audio system Press button Say Call Say Name when prompted Say desired name voice tag Say desired location phone number type Only stored locations can be selected 6 Say Yes to confirm and make a call oR wh x Tip A shortcut to each of the following func tions is available 1 Say
130. arted This is caused by increased fluid viscosity due to the cold weather and does not indicate a mal function When this happens increase the engine RPM by depressing the accelerator until the RPM reaches 1 500 rpm then release or let the engine idle for two or three minutes to warm up the fluid D130300AUN Tilt steering Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive while permitting you to see the instru ment panel warning lights and gauges XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 35 Features of your vehicle l RS OXM049033N To change the steering wheel angle pull down the lock release lever 1 adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle 2 and height 3 if equipped then pull up the lock release lever to lock the steering wheel in place Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving OXM049034N D130500AUN Horn To sound the horn press the horn sym bols on your steering wheel Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly x NOTICE To sound the horn press the area indi cated by the horn symbol on your steer ing wheel see illustration The horn will operate only when this area is pressed A CAUTION Do not strike
131. at weight oil you should use consult an authorized KIA dealer E120500AUN Check spark plugs and ignition system Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary Also check all ignition wiring and compo nents to be sure they are not cracked worn or damaged in any way E120600AUN To keep locks from freezing To keep the locks from freezing squirt an approved de icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening If a lock is covered with ice squirt it with an approved de icing fluid to remove the ice If the lock is frozen internally you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury E120700AUN Use approved window washer anti freeze in system To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing add an approved window washer anti freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the con tainer Window washer anti freeze is available from an authorized KIA dealer and most auto parts outlets Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti freeze as these may damage the paint finish eS ame iS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle E120800AAM Don t let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet If the
132. ation To equalize tread wear it is recom mended that the tires be rotated every 12 000 km 7 500 miles or sooner if irregular wear develops During rotation check the tires for correct balance When rotating tires check for uneven wear and damage Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres sure improper wheel alignment out of balance wheels severe braking or severe cornering Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible After rotation be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness Refer to Tire and wheels in section 8 XM CAN ENG 7 qXp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 35 Maintenance Without a spare tire a ae SS S2BLA790A Directional tires if equipped q D SS S E CBGQ0707A Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated x NOTICE Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left G200500AUN Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance In most cases you will not need to have your wheels aligned again However if you notice unusual tire wear o
133. ay from water or any liquid If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids it will not be covered by your manufactur er s vehicle warranty This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation OXM049200 D040400AHM Restrictions in handling keys When leaving keys with parking lot and valet attendants the following proce dures will ensure that your vehicle s glove box compartment can not be Opened in your absence 1 Press and hold the release button 1 and remove the mechanical key 2 Close and then lock the glove box using the mechanical key 3 Leave the smart key with the atten dant The glove box can not be opened without the mechanical key So am Seis XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle OHM048005 D040500AHM Battery replacement A smart key battery should last for sever al years but if the smart key is not work ing properly try replacing the battery with a new one If you are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery contact an authorized KIA dealer x NOTICE The circuit inside the smart key can have a problem if exposed to moisture or static electricity If you
134. back of songs in the iPod can be different from the order searched in the audio system If the iPod crashes due to its own malfunction reset the iPod Reset Refer to iPod manual An iPod may not operate normally on low battery A CAUTION IN USING iPod DEVICE The Kia iPod Power Cable is needed in order to operate an iPod with the audio buttons on the audio system The USB cable provided by Apple may cause malfunction and should not be used for Kia vehicles The Kia iPod Power Cable may be purchased through your Kia Dealership When connecting iPod with the iPod Power Cable insert the con nector to the multimedia socket completely If not inserted com pletely communications between iPod and audio may be interrupted When adjusting the sound effects of an iPod and the audio system the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound Deactivate turn off the equalizer function of an iPod when adjust ing the audio system s volume and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod Continued When the iPod cable is connected the system can be switched to the AUX mode even without the iPod device and may cause noise Disconnect the iPod cable when you are not using the iPod device When not using iPod with car audio detach the iPod cable from iPod Otherwise the iPod may remain in accessory mode and may not work properly
135. be replaced when necessary and while fully applying it from the released should not be washed position Also the parking brake alone You can clean the filter when inspecting should securely hold the vehicle on a fair the air cleaner element ly steep grade If the stroke is more or less than specified have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized KIA dealer Clean the filter by using compressed air Stroke 5 6 clicks at a force of 20 kg 44 Ibs 196 N XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 57 AM Page 22 p Maintenance CAUTION Do not drive with the air cleaner removed this will result in exces sive engine wear e When removing the air cleaner fil ter be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake or damage may result e Use a KIA genuine part Use of non genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor 7 OXM079014 2 Wipe the inside of the air cleaner P 3 Replace the air cleaner filter 4 Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas replace the ele ment more often than the usual recom mended intervals XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 57 AM Page 23 Maintenance CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER IF EQUIPPED Filter inspection y gt a The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule If t
136. because for example the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use recharge it by slow charging trickle for 10 hours If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used recharge it at 20 30A for two hours XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 31 Maintenance G190300AAM Reset items Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected e Auto up down window See section 4 e Sunroof See section 4 e Trip computer See section 4 e Climate control system See section 4 e Clock See section 4 e Audio See section 4 XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 10 58 AM Page 32 p TIRES AND WHEELS G200100AUN Tire care For proper maintenance safety and maximum fuel economy you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle G200200AUN EU Recommended cold tire inflation pressures All tire pressures including the spare should be checked when the tires are cold Cold Tires means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 6 km one mile Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride vehicle handling and minimum tire wear For recommended inflation pressure refer to Tire an
137. before towing CAUTION Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section Your vehicle can tow a trailer To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the infor mation in Weight of the trailer that appears later in this section Remember that trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering requires correct equip ment and it has to be used properly This section contains many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers Please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transaxle wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the load of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads This additional burden generates extra heat The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements So am Ae ins XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 54 P Driving your vehicle E140100AUN Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large t
138. by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best pos sible quality reproduction However in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear This can be due to factors such as the dis tance from the radio station closeness of other strong radio stations or the pres ence of buildings bridges or other large obstructions in the area AM reception IONOSPHERE JBM002 AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies These long low frequency radio waves can fol low the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmos phere In addition they curve around obstructions so that they can provide bet ter signal coverage XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio gxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ah Features of your vehicle FM radio station Mountains JBM003 FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth s surface Because of this FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station Also FM signals are easily affected by buildings mountains or other obstruc tions These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio The following conditions are normal
139. can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance however higher viscosity engine oils are required for sat isfactory lubrication in hot weather Using oils of any viscosity other than those rec ommended could result in engine dam age When choosing an oil consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be oper ated in before the next oil change Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers TC l 30 F 20 10 O Temperature A Gasoline Engine Oil O 10 20 30 40 100 50 120 1 For better fuel economy it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W 20 API SM ILSAC GF 4 However if the engine oil is not available in your country select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 7 Specifications amp Consumer information VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN o CERTIFICATION Frame Number 2 aes bo VIN Label if equipped OXM089001 OENO86004N H010000AXM The VIN is also on a plate attached to the H020000AUN ee The vehicle identification number VIN is top of the dashboard The number on the The vehicle certification label attached the number used in registering your vehi plate can easily be seen through the on the driver s side center pillar gives the cle and in all legal matters pertaining to windshield from out
140. ce this may damage the surface of the glass If ice should restrict the movement of the mirror do not force the mirror for adjustment To remove ice use a deicer spray or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water Your vehicle is equipped with both left hand and right hand outside rearview mirrors The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch The mir ror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street A CAUTION If the mirror is jammed with ice do not adjust the mirror by force Use D an approved spray de icer not radi ator antifreeze to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 43 Features of your vehicle CAUTION e The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjust ing angles but the motor contin ues to operate while the switch is pressed Do not press the switch longer than necessary the motor may be damaged Do not attempt to adjust the out side rearview mirror by hand Doing so may damage the parts OXM049039 i OXM049038 D140201 AHM EE D140202AHM EU Remote control Folding the outside rearview mirror Electric type if equipped To fold the outside rearview mirror grasp The electric remote control mirror switch the housing of the mirror and then fold it allows you to ad
141. ch and exit the vehicle 2 Make sure that all doors and tailgate and engine hood are closed and latched 3 Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system or smart key or ignition key After completion of the steps above the hazard warning lights will blink for smart key the chime also sounds once to indi cate that the system is armed If any door or tailgate or engine hood remains open the hazard warning lights and the chime will not operate and the theft alarm will not arm If all doors and tailgate and engine hood are closed after the lock button is pressed the haz ard warning lights blink once The system can also be armed by lock ing the doors with the key from the front doors however the hazard warning lights will not blink using this method x NOTICE The theft alarm system by the key can be deactivated by an authorized KIA dealer If you want this feature consult an authorized KIA dealer Do not arm the system until all pas sengers have left the vehicle If the system is armed while a passenger s remains in the vehicle the alarm may be activated when the remaining pas senger s leave the vehicle If any door or tailgate or engine hood is opened within 30 seconds after the system enters the armed stage the system is disarmed to prevent an unnecessary alarm ne XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 38 AM Page 14 P Features of your vehicle
142. channels visit sirius com in the United States sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehi cle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satel lite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possi ble Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception SIRIUS Satellite Radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broad casts music sports news and entertain ment programming to radio receivers which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed as well as for the home portable and wire less devices and through an Internet connection on personal computer Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and an introductory trial sub scription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle
143. chor system EE TE A uu A S T E A A T T 3 37 Lubricants and capacities A E E E a a T 4 Luggage box E T A Sin ies E E E 6 piain Wik bine E E vi ee bes e s 4 95 Luggage net holder eee eG E EA 500 SOSEC Sa6U E eases des T 4 99 Luggage rack see root rack aval Wing i eiass 6 el wire aieiei8 oce Sieve aceieiers sleieias aiaiare 4 101 Lumbar support E A E saison A oars veleidie we aides lave A E 3 7 P Mo S Maintenance Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7 11 Maintenance schedule teereereeeereeeeereeeeeceeseeseereeeeeececeees TET Maintenance services TAE AA I A A A T E 7 4 Owner maintenance A A A A T EA E E AE 7 5 Tire maintenance sesescsocosecosccocoooesoesoocsoessoososossososoosooooo 7 37 Manual climate control system ETIE PN E AEEA b s aie seu ese 4 74 Air conditioning E E 4 79 Climate control air filter a E E E A bas ad Siw eee see sis 4 82 Heating and air conditioning sessssosssoecoossososssssssoecesseces 4 75 Manual transaxgle sseeeeeeeeererrereeeerereeseeereecececcereseseeeceeececceee 5 12 Memory fuse wT ee 7 47 M IrroOrsg teeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeseseseceecececcceeesesseeceeceeoceceeseeseeeseeeeereeee 4 36 Electric chromic mirror ECM cece cecececcccccscncnsesesesens 4 36 Inside rearview MILTOL rr eee eee eee eens 4 36 Outside rearview mirror tiseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeseeseeeeeee 4 42 Moonroof see panoramic SUNLOOL eteeereeeeeererereeeeseeseeeeeee 4 30 Multi G0 IN sR 7 48 N Neck restraints see head
144. cian for recommendations C020304AUN One person per belt Two people including children should never attempt to use a single seat belt This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident C020305AAM Do not lie down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve max imum effectiveness of the restraint sys tem all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the vehicle is moving A seat belt cannot provide prop er protection if the person Is lying down in the rear seat or if the front and rear seats are in a reclined position XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 Safety features of your vehicle C020400AEN Care of seat belts Seat belt systems should never be disas sembled or modified In addition care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges doors or other abuse 11 41 AM Page 30 P C020401AEN Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected peri odically for wear or damage of any kind Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible C020402AUN Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry If belts become dirty they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water Bleach dye strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric C020403ASA
145. compartmepi 26th estates nteassasnates 2 4 7 2 WE iit ee ee ey 7 20 Engine coolant avai ol eyw sie a eiecops 0 6 er iw iaiere esleieie wre are eiwierece E aie eels E cies N 7 15 Folding the E E T T 3 11 Engine number evsssseseeseseeeeseseeesseeesseeeeseeneneeneneenenes g 8 Fone wheckddve AWD sneon 5 21 Engine Oil eeeeeeeteereeeteeertrertreerterertteereterrteenteeenreeenteees 7 14 Front seat adjustment mantal eeiiissisiiatnsiasis 34 Engine oyerheatsseeeeeteererteerteeerteerrtrerrrteerteereteen 6 6 Front seat adjustment power iisisti 3 5 Engine start stop DUTON mrsiti 5 7 NT GUase ere eee ee A957 Engine temperature Sage stevens tee eitioetteaeornnneteaeesieys 4 46 Fuel gaugerssrscsesessseeeseseeesseeeeessseeeneneeeeenseneeeseeeeeeeen 4 47 Engine Will not start ess eeieeestcta tote ston cntemngtnsentonsnnensaneests 6 3 Fuel requirements srerssseseseeeseeeseeeteeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeneeeeeeneaes ie Evaporative emission control including ORVR I GG E nesta agit A E E T 7 45 System E A E E E A A E T viele oer AE 7 60 Fuse relay panel description re eee 7 A9 Exhaust ARARE TON control Joem cas Oe 7 61 Memory fioe onines ipisna noak TAF Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7 11 Wiis cese oerercsemnsesiounsschareessasteusseieemenamnned fae Exterior oy 1k oon 7 5 4 ISTO 1 aie A A sncaeado gin waaquascosnandenapsiees 4 101 Rool mek aena ee E n 4 101 1 4 XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 5 Ignition
146. connect the USB device directly to the multimedia termi nal of the vehicle If USB device is divided by logical drives only the music files on the highest priority drive are recog nized by car audio Devices such as MP3 players cel lular phones and digital cameras may not be compatible with a standard USB I F Some non standard USB devices METAL COVER TYPE USB can be unrecognizable Some USB flash memory readers such as CF SD microSD etc or external HDD type devices can be unrecognizable Music files protected by DRM DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE MENT are not recognizable Continued Continued The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio Always back up important data on a personal storage device Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack Please make certain only to use plug type connector products as shown below XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ab Features of your vehicle Using USB device 1 AUX USB Selection Button If the auxiliary device is connected it switches to AUX or USB mode to play the sound from the auxiliary player If there is no auxiliary device then the message No Media will become dis played on the LCD for 3 seconds and returns to previous mode 2 TRACK Selection Button e Press the TRACK V button for less than 0 8 second
147. ctive in preventing a loss of control It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety When you apply your brakes under con ditions which may lock the wheels you may hear a tik tik sound from the brakes or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal This is normal and it means your ESC is active x NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is start ed These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic Stability Control System is functioning properly 12 02 PM Page 33 P E070501AUN EU ESC operation ESC ON condition e When the ignition is turned ON ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 seconds then ESC is turned on e Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off ESC OFF indica tor will illuminate To turn the ESC on press the ESC OFF button ESC OFF indicator light will go off e When starting the engine you may hear a slight ticking sound This is the ESC performing an automatic system self check and does not indicate a problem When operating When the ESC is in operation ESC indicator light blinks EE When the Electronic Stability Control is operating properly you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle This is only the effect of brake control and in
148. d As the vehicle is driven the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 12 p Maintenance GO50800AUN G051200AUN Air cleaner filter Coolant A CAUTION The use of a non specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunc tion and failure Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8 G051500AUN Brake hoses and lines Visually check for proper installation chafing cracks deterioration and any leakage Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately G051600AAM Brake Clutch if equipped fluid Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir The level should be between MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 13 Maintenance G051700AUN Parking brake Inspect the parking brake system includ ing the parking brake lever or pedal and cables G051900AUN Brake discs pads calipers and rotors Check the pads for excessive wear discs for run out and wear and calipers for fluid leakage GO052000AUN Exhaust pipe and muffler Visually inspect the exhaust pipes muf fler and hangers for cracks deterioration or da
149. d engine oil Drive belt A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 50 P Driving your vehicle WINTER DRIVING eo E120000ASA Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other prob lems To minimize the problems of winter driving you should follow these sugges tions E120100AUN EC Snowy or icy conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow it may be necessary to use snow tires on your tires If snow tires are needed it is nec essary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Furthermore speeding rapid accelera tion sudden brake applications and sharp turns are potentially very haz ardous practices During deceleration use engine braking to the fullest extent Sudden brake appli cations on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur You need to keep suffi cient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle Also apply the brake genily E120101AUN Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your vehicle make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle s handling in all weather conditions Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads
150. d rear soeaker sound will be attenu ated e BALANCE Control Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound left speaker sound will be attenuated When the control knob is turned counter clockwise left speaker sound will be emphasized right speaker sound will be attenuated 8 SETUP Button Press this button to enter SETUP mode If no action is taken for 8 seconds it will return to previous mode In SETUP mode rotate the TUNE knob to move the cursor between items and push the TUNE knob to select e SCROLL Select whether long file names are scrolled continuously ON or just once OFF e SDVC Select this item to turn the SDVC Speed Dependent Volume Control feature ON or OFF If it is turned ON volume level is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed e PBASS PowerBass This function creates virtual sound effects and allows adjustments to the BASS level HIGH MID LOW OFF HIGH e SAT if available Select default display of SIRIUS mode Category Channel name or Artist Song Title can be selected e PHONE if available Select this item to enter BLUETOOTH setup mode Refer to BLUETOOTH PHONE OPERATION section for detailed information XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page at Features of your vehicle CD PA710XM USA CANADA ET SIRIUS Bluetooth INFO SETUP ENTER a 3 4 5
151. d on whether or not the seat belts are fas tened and how severe the impact is The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation with two lev els A first stage level is provided for mod erate severity impacts A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts The passenger s front air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions However children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat According to the impact severity and seat belt usage the SRSCM SRS Control Module controls the air bag inflation Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Additionally your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger s seat The occupant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger s seat and will turn off the front passenger s air bag under certain conditions For more detail see Occupant detection system in this section XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 53 Safety features of your vehicle x NOTICE e Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the sun Continued Never place a child in any child or booster seat in the front seat WARNING Manufacturers are required by gov ernment regulations to provide a contact point concerni
152. d restraint system use the following procedure OENO036101 To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats do the fol lowing 1 Place the child restraint system in the seat and route the lap shoulder belt around or through the restraint follow ing the restraint manufacturer s instructions Be sure the seat belt web bing is not twisted 2 Fasten the lap shoulder belt latch into the buckle Listen for the distinct click sound Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency OEN036102 3 Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extend ed it will shift the retractor to the Auto Lock child restraint mode XM CAN OEN036103 4 Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible clicking or ratcheting sound This indicates that the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode If no distinct sound is heard repeat steps 3 and 4 ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 35 OEN036104 5 Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor 6 Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place If it is not release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through
153. d wheels in section 8 OXM079101L All specifications sizes and pres sures can be found on a label attached to the driver s side center pillar CAUTION Underinflation also results in excessive wear poor handling and reduced fuel economy Wheel deformation also is possible Keep your tire pres sures at the proper levels If a tire frequently needs refilling have it checked by an author ized KIA dealer Overinflation produces a harsh ride excessive wear at the center of the tire tread and a greater possibility of dam age from road hazards XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 33 Maintenance J CAUTION Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pres sures by 28 to 41 kPa 4 to 6 psi Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pres sure or the tires will be under inflated Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps Without the valve cap dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage If a valve cap is missing install a new one as soon as possible N CAUTION Tire pressure Always observe the following Check tire pressure when the tires are cold After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn t been driven more than 1 6 km one mile since startup Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires Never overload your vehicle Be careful not t
154. ders E E AE AA E 4 96 Brake system E E E E P A A E sGue caenieesaaeea aces 5 27 Anti lock brake system AB S E A TE 5 30 Electronic stability control ESC eeiseeicnereree 5 32 Parking brake E E E E E E E E E E TNT 5 28 Power brakes e E E A area A A E 5 27 Brake clutch fluid E E E 6 oi 0 6 sie E E E E wisieece oe Susie 7 18 Bulb wattage E E E E win T E E A aaainrere orev 2 C Capacities Lubricants ey CT ee ee ee 4 Care Exterior CATE error 7 54 Interior oy i oor 7 59 Tire Care stereerereeeereeeeeerereeeeeereseseeeeoseeeerorossereroceeeereceese 7 32 Cargo capacity E E T E E A E 5 63 Cargo weight issn wide opens 6s inn 5 16s oeln E ww 1 bio 0 ui ie eu eiute o Gid wie oie eiels 4 eie s 5 67 Center console storage A a eigue E A iciovw eaten acne wele eareets Ciba oo are ET 4 94 Central door lock switch OTT EETEEPRRE EEC CR TEC CR TET eee 4 17 Certification label E T A E r E A E ow eve 8 5 65 Changing tires eee Te ee Te ee ee ee eC er eee 6 9 XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 3 Index Safety chains Tre eee ee eT ee N 5 54 Checking tire inflation pressurereeeeteeeteeeetereererereeeee 7 33 Dashboard see instrument cluster eeeeeeeereeereeereerreeeeee 4 44 Child restraint System eeeeeerererereetererrererrerererrereererereerees 3 31 Dashboard illumination see instrument Ano EA mode Passenger seat belt er ee 3 34 panel illumination oC eT rT re Tr re rr er re re 4 45 Roweraichor syster isasi 3 37 D
155. dicates nothing unusual e When moving out of the mud or slippery road pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rom revo lutions per minute to increase fe So ann ei XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 34 Driving your vehicle E070502AUN EU ESC operation off ESC OFF state e To cancel ESC operation 2 press the ESC OFF button OFF ESC OFF indicator light illu minates e If the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position when ESC is off ESC remains off Upon restarting the engine the ESC will automatically turn on again E ESC indicator light ee E ESC OFF indicator light ee OFF E070503AAM EU Indicator light When the ignition switch is turned ON the indicator light illuminates then goes off if ESC system is operating normally The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating and illuminates when ESC fails to operate The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the but ton CAUTION Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction When replacing tires make sure they are the same size as your original tires XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 35 P Driving your vehicle E070504AAM EU ESC OFF usage When driving e It s a good idea to keep the ESC turned on for daily driving whenever possible e To turn ESC off while driving press the ESC
156. direction indicated by the turn signals If the arrow comes on but does not blink blinks more rapidly than normal or does not illuminate at all it indicates a malfunction in the turn sig nal system You should consult your deal er for repairs D150306AUN a High beam indicator This indicator illuminates when the head lights are on and in the high beam posi tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash to Pass position This indicator illuminates when the front fog lights are on D150309AUN Front fog light indicator if equipped D150331ABH Tail light indicator if equipped a ie This indicator illuminates when the tail lights are on D150307AHM Engine oil pressure warning light This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low If the warning light illuminates while driv ing 1 Drive safely to the side of the road and stop 2 With the engine off check the engine oil level If the level is low add oil as required If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available call an authorized KIA dealer CAUTION If the engine is not stopped imme diately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated severe damage could result ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 54 Features of your vehicle A CAUTION If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is run ning seriou
157. drest push and hold the release button 1 while pulling it up to the desired position 2 To lower the headrest push and hold the release but ton 1 on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position 3 XM CAN ENG 3 0 11726 2009 Removal Outer To remove the headrest 1 Raise it as far as it can go 2 Insert the small thin bar into the release hole A 3 While pressing the release hole A press the button B then pull the headrest up To reinstall the headrest insert the head rest holes 3 into the poles and press the headrest down Then adjust it to the appropriate height and make sure the headrest is locked in place 11 40 AM Page 17 Center al Center To remove the headrest raise it as far as it can go then press the release button while pulling the headrest up 2 To reinstall the headrest put the head rest poles 3 into the holes while press ing the release button 1 Then adjust it to the appropriate height Safety features of your vehicle OXM039062N 3rd row headrest if equipped The headrest will fold down automatically when the seatback folding Always be sure the headrest has locked into position after you return the seatback Removal To remove the headrest press the both release buttons A inside the headrest while pulling the headrest up To reinstall the headrest put the headrest holes into the poles and pres
158. e 24 Driving your vehicle e You must consciously take the effort to learn how to corner in a 4WD vehicle Do not rely on your experience in con ventional 2WD vehicles in choosing safe cornering speed in 4WD mode For starters you must drive more slow ly in 4WD e Drive carefully off road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees Become familiar with the off road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving If you need to drive in the water stop your vehicle set your transfer to the 4WD LOCK mode and drive at less OXM059027N than 8 km h 5 mph e Always hold the steering wheel firmly when you are driving off road e Make sure all passengers are wearing seat belts XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 25 Driving your vehicle NOTICE e Do not drive in water if the level is higher than the bottom of the vehicle e Check your brake condition once you are out of mud or water Press the brake pedal several times as you move slowly until you feel normal braking forces return e Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in off road condi tions such as sand mud or water Always wash your vehicle thoroughly after off road use especially cleaning the bottom of the vehicle e Since the driving torque is always P applied to the 4 wheels the perform ance of the 4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the condition of the tires Be
159. e Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs OXM059013 Parking brake Applying the parking brake Foot type To engage the parking brake first apply the foot brake and then depress the park ing brake pedal down as far as possible OXM059015 E070201AXM Hand type To engage the parking brake first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on a gradient the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on manual transaxle vehicles A CAUTION Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 29 Driving your vehicle OXM059014 Releasing the parking brake Foot type To release the parking brake depress the parking brake pedal a second time while applying the foot brake The pedal will automatically extend to the fully released position OXM059016 E070202AFD U1 Hand type To release the parking brake first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly Secondly press the release button 1 and lower the parking brake lever 2 while holding the button ae the ignition switch ON do not start the XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 30 Driving your vehicle OJQ BRAKE Check the
160. e OFF position without depressing the brake pedal If the ENGINE START STOP button is in the ACC position for more than 1 hour the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge ON Green indicator e With automatic transaxle Press the ENGINE START STOP button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started Do not leave the ENGINE START STOP button in the ON position for a long time The battery may discharge because the engine is not running START RUN Not illuminated e With automatic transaxle To start the engine depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START STOP button with the shift lever in the P Park or the N Neutral position For your safety start the engine with the shift lever in the P Park position NOTICE If you press the ENGINE START STOP button without depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles the engine will not start and the ENGINE START STOP button changes as follow OFF gt ACC gt ON gt OFF or ACC XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 9 Driving your vehicle E040300AHM EU Starting the engine with a smart key if equipped 1 Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle 2 Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied 3 Automatic Transaxle Place the transaxle shift lever in P Park Depress the brake pedal fully
161. e a year e Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle e Check for vibrations in the steering wheel Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel or change in its straight ahead position Notice if your vehicle constantly turns Slightly or pulls to one side when trav eling on smooth level road When stopping listen and check for unusual sounds pulling to one side increased brake pedal travel or hard to push brake pedal If any slipping or changes in the oper ation of your transaxle occurs check the transaxle fluid level e Check the automatic transaxle P Park function e Check the parking brake Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle water dripping from the air condition ing system during or after use is nor mal e Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir e Check the operation of all exterior lights including the stoplights turn sig nals and hazard warning flashers e Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare G030104AHM At least twice a year i e every Spring and Fall e Check the radiator heater and air con ditioning hoses for leaks or damage Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid Check the headlight alignment Check the muffler exhaust pipes shields and clamps Chec
162. e air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling however continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale During cooling operation you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake This is a normal system opera tion characteristic So am iS XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 45 AM Page 82 P Features of your vehicle Outside air Heater core Climate control air filter Evaporator core OHM048209 Climate control air filter if equipped The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehi cle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time the air flow from the air vents may decrease resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside fresh air position is selected If this hap pens inspect and replace the climate control air filter Refer to climate control air filter in section 7 If you re unsure about replacing proce dure have it done by an authorized KIA dealer x NOTICE e Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads more frequent air conditioner filter inspect
163. e best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of cor rosive materials Attention to the under side of the vehicle is particularly impor tant e If you live in a high corrosion area where road salts are used near the ocean areas with industrial pollution acid rain etc you should take extra care to prevent corrosion In winter hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over e When cleaning underneath the vehicle give particular attention to the compo nents under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view Do a thorough job just dampening the accu mulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it Water under high pres sure and steam are particularly effec tive in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials When cleaning lower door panels rocker panels and frame members be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion Keep your garage dry Don t park your vehicle in a damp poorly ventilated garage This creates a favor able environment for corrosion This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow ice or mud Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moistu
164. e cannot be driven out under its own power Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing e The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequent ly 12 06 PM Page 18 P CAUTION Attach a towing strap to the tow hook Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for tow ing may damage the body of your vehicle Only use a cable or chain specifi cally intended for use in towing vehicles Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided Before emergency towing check that the hook is not broken or damaged Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook Do not jerk the hook Apply it steadily and with even force To avoid damaging the hook do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle Always pull straight ahead XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 OXM069009 e Use a towing strap less than 5 m 16 feet long Attach a white or red cloth about 30 cm 12 inches wide in the middle of the strap for easy visibility e Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loose during towing 12 06 PM Page 19 F080301AAM EU Emergency towing precautions Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn t locked Place the transaxle shift lever in N Neutral Release the parking bake Press the brake pedal with more force than usual since you will have reduced brake performance More steering effor
165. e identification number VIN 8 7 Vehicle certification label 8 7 Tire specification and pressure label 8 8 Engine number 8 8 Specifications amp Consumer information e XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 2 Specifications amp Consumer information DIMENSIONS 010000AXM EU 1710 67 3 1745 68 7 1755 69 1 with roof rack 2 with sunroof and roof rack Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase BULB WATTAGE lOS30000AXM EU Light Bulb Headlights Low Headlights High Front turn signal lights Position lights Side turn signal Front fog lights Stop and tail lights Tail lights Rear turn signal lights Back up lights High mounted stop light License plate lights Map lamps Room lamps Luggage lamp Vanity mirror lamps Door mood lamps If equipped 1 Can use 28 8 XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 3 S ecifications amp Consumer information TIRES AND WHEELS I1020000AXM EU Tire size Se P235 65R17 7 0Jx17 230 Full size tire P235 60R18 7 0Jx18 33 Compact spare tire 420 if equipped T165 90R17 4 0Tx17 Cold tire inflation pressure kPa psi 230 33 420 Wheel lug nut torque kg m lb ft Nem Wheel size 9 11 65 79 88 107 60 60 A CAUTION When replacing tires use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle Using tires of a different size can dam
166. e pro slowly after 20 seconds position the grammed or the original hand held hand held transmitter 2 8 cm 1 to 3 transmitter may be used to activate the inches away from the HomeLink sur device e g garage door entry door lock OHD046306N face etc In the event that there are still pro Erasing programmed HomeLink but 3 Press and hold the hand held transmit gramming difficulties contact HomeLink tons ter button or press and cycle as at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at T d bedin Canadian Proaramamina aa oneec o erase the three programmed buttons escribed in Canadian Programming i individual buttons cannot be erased 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash e Press and hold the left and center first slowly and then rapidly When the buttons simultaneously until the indi indicator light begins to flash rapidly cator light begins to flash approxi release both buttons mately 20 seconds Release both but The previous device has now been tons Do not hold for longer than 30 erased and the new device can be acti seconds vated by pushing the HomeLink button HomeLink is now in the train or learning that has just been programmed This pro mode and can be programmed at any cedure will not affect any other pro time grammed HomeLink buttons 4 40 XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 41 P Features of your vehicle Canadian Programming Garage amp gate openers During program
167. e two fac tors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment inflation signal Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed angles of impact and the densi ty and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident It is much more likely that you will sim ply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision In order to help provide protection in a severe collision the air bags must inflate rapidly The speed of the air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of the air bag design However air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also caus es the air bags to expand with a great deal of force e There are even circumstances under which contact with the steer ing wheel or passenger air bag can cause fatal inj
168. ector setting of External USB devices is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE then the device will not be recog nized Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12 16 32 USB devices without USB I F authentication may not be recog nizable Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in con tact with people or other objects If you repeatedly connect and dis connect the USB device in a short period of time you may cause damage to the device You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnect ing a USB device Continued Continued If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction Therefore discon nect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode e g Radio Sirius or CD Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of files stored on the device there may be a delay in the recognition of the device This is not an indicator of trouble Do not use the USB device for purpose other than playing music files Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB I F may lower performance or cause trouble Continued XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page me Features of your vehicle Continued If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separately the vehicle s audio system may not recognize the USB device In that case
169. ed portable plas tic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline Do not use cellular phones while refueling Electric current and or electronic interference from cel lular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire When refueling always shut the engine off Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire Once refueling is complete check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed before starting the engine DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can when ignited result in fire Continued XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 29 Features of your vehicle CAUTION e Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the Fuel require ments suggested in section 1 e If the fuel filler cap requires replacement use only a genuine KIA cap or the equivalent speci fied for your vehicle An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a seri ous malfunction of the fuel sys tem or emission control system e Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle Any type Emergency fuel filler lid release a of fuel spilled on painted surfaces if the fuel filler lid does not open using gt may damage the paint the remote fuel filler lid release
170. ed speed which must be more than 40 km h 25 mph OXM059021N 3 Push the SET switch and release it at the desired speed The SET indica tor light in the instrument cluster will illuminate Release the accelerator at the same time The desired speed will automatically be maintained On a steep grade the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going downhill OXM059022N E090200AAM EU To increase cruise control set speed Follow either of these procedures e Push the RES switch and hold it Your vehicle will accelerate Release the switch at the speed you want Push the RES switch and release it immediately The cruising speed will increase by 2 0 km h 1 2 mph each time the RES switch is operated in this manner XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 41 Driving your vehicle E090400AUN To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on depress the accelerator pedal Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed To return to the set speed take your foot _ off the accelerator OXM059021N E090300AAM EU E090500AAM EU an To decrease the cruising speed To cancel cruise control do one Follow either of these procedures of the following Press the brake pedal Press the clutch pedal with a manual e Push the SET switch and hold it Your vehicle
171. eesene 5 50 Wiper blades Ree 7 25 Wipers and washers seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeecececeeeseeseeeeeee 4 68 1 10
172. efogging Windshield r rrr rrr rere al Tether anchor system ss sseseseseseseeeseeteeneseeteeeenen 236 Defogging logic Windshield 4 92 Child protector eae dodi lock eee ne eee 4 18 Defroster Rear window See Te re er ES 4 73 ene comtal system Automatic n 4 83 Defrosting Windshield T E E errr ere 4 91 Air conditioning A N EAE EE E 4 89 Digital clock E a a a E T 4 98 Automate heating and ait conditioning ere 4 84 Dimensions re seisatas oS P nal area 2 Manual heating and air conditioning ina se eee cae 3rd row air conditioning DDR ks Kaas a a a 4 79 Displays _ aune ETEN a 4 44 Climate control system Manual ee 4 74 Door locks Ce eC TT ee ee eT Oe ee ee eee 4 15 Air conditioning newewes T aaa EEE as 4 79 Central doa lock h S SE EEE 4 17 D Heating and air conditioning EOE E E E ES 4 7 5 Child protector ra door feck een 4 18 3rd row air conditioning eT TT i i er 4 79 Dank holdets e cup holdas OE 4 96 Climate control air filter 4 82 7 23 Divers ait a ie ee aa 4 98 Driving at mightersesssesseseseeeseeeeeeteseseeeeeeeneseeteeeenenee 5 47 Combined instrument See instrument cluster a 4 44 Driving in flooded ALTCAS treereeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseereerececceceeseene 5 48 COMP ACES Pale TULGer sersteesttssetsenene nian ses Sherer ieersseeteseneoeaes 6 14 Driving in the rajn srssesseseseseeesseesee teens eeeseeneeneneeees 5 48 Compact spare tire replacement E E or 0 G S e0 0 W e e e le eens eceieree a TE 7 37 Coolant DEEE NEEE EET E a Te 1
173. el freeway e If you drive under a bridge If you are driving next to a tall vehicle such as a truck or a bus that blocks the signal If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite e If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by moun tains Mountains Unobstructed area lron bridges SATELITE2 e If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal 10 m 30 ft or more for example on an road that goes through a dense forest e The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the SIR IUS repeater network NOTE There may be other unforeseen cir cumstances leading to reception problems with the SIRIUS satellite radio signal XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ua Features of your vehicle Using a cellular phone or a two way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle noise may be produced from the audio equipment This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment In such a case use the cellu lar phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment Care of compact discs CDs If the temperature inside the vehicle is too high open the vehicle windows for ventilation before using your vehicle audio lt is illegal to copy and use MP3 WMA files without permission Use CDs that are created only by lawful mea
174. es shall feature A2DP and AVRCP functions e Some A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth cellular phones may not play music through the head unit on first try Please try the below i e MenuFilemanagerMusic Option Play via Bluetooth e Please refer to User s Guide of your phone for more detaild informa tions To stop music try stop music by the phone and change audio mode to differernt one e g FM CD iPod XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 1 Before driving 5 3 Key positions 5 4 Engine start stop button 5 7 Manual Transaxle 5 12 Automatic transaxle 5 15 Four wheel drive 4WD 5 21 Brake system 5 27 Cruise control system 5 39 Economical operation 5 43 Special driving conditions 5 45 Winter driving 5 50 Driving your vehicle Trailer towing 5 53 Vehicle load limit 5 62 Vehicle weight glossary 5 67 XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 2 Driving your vehicle E010000AUN EU 44 WARNING ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous If at any time you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle open the win dows immediately e Do not inhale exhaust fumes Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide a colorless odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia tion e Be sure the exhaust system does not leak The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the
175. etal repair or replacement be sure the body shop applies anti corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced G230104AUN Bright metal maintenance e To remove road tar and insects use a tar remover not a scraper or other sharp object To protect the surfaces of bright metal parts from corrosion apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster During winter weather or in coastal areas cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preserva tive If necessary coat the parts with non corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound So am a ist XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 11 00 AM Page 56 Maintenance G230105ASA G230106AAM Underbody maintenance Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may col lect on the underbody If these materials are not removed accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have been treated with rust protection Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month after off road driving and at the end of each winter Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it The lower edges of the doors rocker panels and frame members have drain holes that should not
176. ffer from the illustration OXMO019002N fe So am Seis XM CAN ENG 2 QXP 11 26 2009 11 36 AM Page 4 Your vehicle at a glance ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 15 2 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 20 3 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 19 4 Radiator Gaertn eres ees eee 7 17 S engine Oil Mller Gap ieri 7 14 Ss Engine OINDIDSUCK aaa a 7 14 7 Brake Clutch Fluid Reservoir 7 18 Ss AinGleaner ae ee 7 21 OL FUSE BOK IENA R ee 7 45 10 Negative Battery Terminal 7 29 11 Positive Battery Terminal 7 29 if equipped The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OXM079001N BO30000AUN C1 DA lt _ _ lt _ _ _ _ _ CO COCOOu C K amp S ere XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 38 AM Page 1 Seats 3 2 Seat belts 3 18 Child restraint system 3 31 Air bag advanced supplemental restraint system 3 39 Safety features of your vehicle XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 38 AM Page 2 Safety features of your vehicle SEATS Front seat Forward and backward 2 Seatback angle 3 Seat cushion height Drivers seat 4 Lumbar support Drivers seat 5 6 T E z i a a a l a J 1 5 Seat heater 6 Headrest 2nd row seat 7 Seatback angle and folding 8 Double folding 9 Headrest 10 Armrest
177. flating enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other con trols Passenger s front air bag B240B05L XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 45 Safety features of your vehicle OXM039052N C040300AAM Occupant Detection System ODS Your vehicle is equipped with an occu pant detection system in the front pas senger s seat The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly seated front passenger and determine if the passenger s front air bag should be enabled may inflate or not The driver s front air bag is not affected or controlled by the occupant detection sysiem XM CAN ENG 3 0XP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 46 P Safety features of your vehicle Main components of occupant detec tion system e A detection device located within the front passenger seat cushion e An electronic system which deter mines whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deacti vated A indicator light located on the instru ment panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated e The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the occu pant detection system If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system determines to be of appropriate size and he s
178. forward once to shift up one gear Down Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear So am SiS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle 12 01 PM Page 18 x NOTICE In sports mode the driver must exe cute upshifts in accordance with road conditions taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone e In sports mode only the 6 forward gears can be selected To reverse or park the vehicle move the shift lever to the R Reverse or P Park position as required e In sports mode downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down When the vehicle stops Ist gear is automatically selected e In sports mode when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically e To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is oper ated e When driving on a slippery road push the shift lever forward into the up position This causes the transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road Push the shift lever to the down side to shift back to the Ist gear Shift lock system if equipped For your safety the automatic transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle from P Park or N Neutral into R Reverse unless the brake pedal is depressed To shift the transaxle from
179. from the battery 4 Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked Do not allow the jumper cables to con tact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground Do not lean over the battery when making connections N CAUTION Battery cables Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative ter minal of the discharged battery This can cause the discharged bat tery to overheat and crack releas ing battery acid 5 Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2 000 rpm then start the engine of the vehi cle with the discharged battery If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent you should have your vehi cle checked by an authorized KIA dealer F040200AAM EU Push starting Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle and manual transaxle vehicles equipped with clutch lock system cannot be push started Follow the directions in this section for jump starting So am i SiS XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 6 P What to do in an emergency IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS F050000AAM If your temperature gauge indicates over heating you experience a loss of power or hear loud pinging or knocking the engine will probably be too hot If this happens you should 1 Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so 2 Place the shi
180. front passenger seat is occupied by a child who is not in a CRS the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator may or may not be on and the passenger airbag may or may not deploy ina collision Have the child move to a rear seat to increase their safe ty Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat Don t place any thing on or attach anything such as a blanket or seat heater to the front passenger seat This can adversely affect the occupant detection system Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat These may damage the occupant detection system if they puncture the seat cushion Do not use accessory seat cov ers on the front seats Continued Continued e Accident statistics show that chil dren are safer if they are restrained in the rear as opposed to the front seat It is recommend ed that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child rid ing in a booster seat Air bags can only be used once have an authorized KIA dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment The occupant detection system may not work properly if water coffee or any other liquid includ ing rain gets on the seat Keep the front seat dry at all times Do not place an electronic device such as a laptop computer on the front passenger seat Its electron ic field may cause the ODS to switch to
181. ft Pattern Indicator aes Cruise Indicator br il For more detailed explanations refer to Instrument cluster in section 4 Charging System Warning Light Cruise SET Indicator Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light 4WD system warning light Art 4WD LOCK indicator LOCK CELS t ft o1 Low windshield washer fluid level warning light DBC indicator Key out warning light ECO ECOMINDER indicator 2 OUT if equipped XM CAN ENG 2 QXP 11 26 2009 11 35 AM Page 1 AEE EE ET EIE Interior overview 2 2 Instrument panel overview 2 3 Engine compartment 2 4 XM CAN ENG 2 QXP 11 26 2009 11 35 AM Page 2 Your vehicle at a glance INTERIOR OVERVIEW 1 Door lock nlock DURON meierei 4 15 2 Outside rearview mirror control switch 4 43 3 Central door lock SWITGI 011s 0 eset 4 17 4 Power window lock button sssseee 4 24 5 Power window Switches cccccccesssssseeees 4 21 6 Fuel filler lid release button cccccccees 4 27 7 Rear window wiper button 2 ce se 4 70 8 Rear window washer button 0008 4 70 ESC OER DUMOM e aa a ae action eee 5 32 10 Instrument panel illumination control E Ey crises rach E E te ae ene 4 45 T WV DRIOCK DUTON sec entice teen aes 5 22 12 Rear parking assist system off button 4 59 PSAP BC DUON teams coos ecere en cneeee e
182. ft lever in P Park auto matic transaxle or Neutral manual transaxle and set the parking brake If the air conditioning is on turn it off 3 If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood stop the engine Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating If the fan is not run ning turn the engine off 4 Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing If it is not missing check to see that it is tight If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory check for coolant leaking from the radiator hoses or under the vehicle If the air conditioning had been in use it is nor mal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop O1 If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized KIA dealer for assistance 6 If you cannot find the cause of the overheating wait until the engine tem perature has returned to normal Then if coolant has been lost carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark 7 Proceed with caution keeping alert for further signs of overheating If over heating happens again call an author ized KIA dealer for assi
183. fted to 4WD AUTO mode y i Indicator light is at speed above 40 km h 25 mph If the vehicle decelerates illuminated to speeds below 30 km h 19 mph however the transfer mode is shifted into 4WD LOCK mode again NOTICE e When driving on normal roads deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode by pushing the 4WD LOCK button the indicator light goes off Driving on normal roads with 4WD LOCK mode especially when cornering may cause mechanical noise or vibration The noise and vibration will disappear when the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated Some parts of the power train may be dam aged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration e When the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front wheels This shock is not a mechanical failure XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 23 Driving your vehicle For safe four wheel drive opera tion HILL1 HILL2 e When you are driving up or down hills drive as straight as possible Use extreme caution in going up or down steep hills since you may flip your vehicle over depending on the grade terrain and water mud conditions e Do not try to drive in deep standing water or mud since such conditions can stall your engine and clog your exhaust pipes Do not drive down steep hills since it requires extreme skill to maintain control of the vehicle So am SiS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Pag
184. fter prompt 4 Say Yes to confirm 5 By manual operation Select BT Off in PHONE menu then after announcement say YES to confirm m Phone Book In Vehicle e Adding Entry Phone numbers and voice tags can be registered Entries registered in the phone can also be transferred e Adding Entry by Voice 1 Press button 2 Say Phonebook The system replies with all available commands To skip the information message press again and then a beep is heard 3 Say Add Entry 4 Say By Voice to proceed 5 Say the name of the entry when prompted 6 Say Yes to confirm 7 Say the phone number of that entry when prompted 8 Say Store if phone number input is finished 9 Say a phone number type Home Work Mobile Other or Default is available 10 Say Yes to complete adding entry 11 Say Yes to store additional location for this contact or say Cancel to fin ish the process XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page at Features of your vehicle x NOTICE The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine Numbers that are ten or greater cannot be recognized You can enter each digit individually or group digits together in preferred string lengths To speed up input it is a good idea to group all digits into a continuous string The display corresponding to each operation appe
185. g for approximately 6 seconds or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven please have an authorized KIA dealer inspect the pre tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as soon as possible XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 27 Safety features of your vehicle C020300AUN EU C020306AUN EC Seat belt precautions Infant or small child You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country Child and or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat For more information about the use of these restraints refer to Child restraint sys tem in this section XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 28 P Safety features of your vehicle x NOTICE Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the require ments of the Safety Standards of your country Before buying any child restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets the Safety Standard of your country The restraint must be appropriate for your child s height and weight Check the label on the child restraint for this information Refer to Child restraint system in this section C020301AHM Larger children Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap shoulder belts The l
186. g the vehicle eT TT re eee re er ere eee 5 46 Roof rack biasare aie oldisleie sia s 1s siuie e s bie nlv bie Ole sieiele ets bie e oie ele s isiele cicse e e sia e o s wisib eves 0 4 101 Safety chains er re eer er ee ee 5 54 Seat belts E E A T Geueuses T oat weeacmoes cnare genes euretes os 3 18 Pre tensioner seat belt EE E leew rsie eis woelestieiew eee Ca blurs cio er e scis s 3 24 Seat belt _ Driver s E Gluvasbvevs ue ele wi0 oie eat ovecsverb dia Gia E T A T 3 20 Seat belt warning paleet ae eteuesceceusceesesGeusoeseese tee car senonseeeess 3 19 Seat belts Front passenger and rear seats 3 22 Seat heater EPE oie E Gibbs bi8 6 60 4 E E E E ein odie diea bre ware corer 3 9 Seatback pocket eget Gale AN A ban seataneedeuoerwereseets crest eaeteueltes 3 10 Seating capacity bain slave oi nts Wipe A 0 0 n5eve oleyeia eleleve sy o eraypie ele yerere e eraveleielsiavele vies es 5 62 Seats err ee ee ee ee reer ee ee eee re 3 2 Armrest ideas a Seewaedonareeneseomeceeueuteasntenseeeseueequsesesseeceeacces 3 18 Folding the rear RS oY een 3 11 Front seat adjustment _ manual ss snsOie bre s s A w woe A E 3 4 Front seat adjustment _ power A A A wis u cra s vine wie o s ore dre steae nie ele 3 5 Headrest ee er ee re er 3 7 3 16 Lumbar support E EE We eee wren A deere E esone E 3 7 Pear seat adjustment A AAAA A A A A E 3 11 Seat heater E E E A A A A T E A E E AS E 3 9 Seatback pocket E E E set se beds ee eee ede sees 3 10 XM
187. gh handling Immobilizer system malfunction could occur J CAUTION Do not change alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer sys tem to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized KIA dealer Malfunctions caused by improper alterations adjustments or modifi cations to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 5 Features of your vehicle D010301AUN EC Limp home override procedure When you turn the ignition switch to the ON position if the immobilizer indicator goes off after blinking 5 times your transponder equipped in the ignition key is out of order You cannot start the engine without the limp home procedure To start the engine you have to input your password by using the ignition switch Your password is only available from an authorized KIA dealership Contact an authorized dealer for more information The following procedure is how to input your password of 2345 as an example 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion The immobilizer indica
188. ght 1588 With brake system 3500 poo a N A Not applicable LD To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the informa tion in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section XM CAN 12 03 PM Page 60 ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight C190E01JM E140601AUN Weight of the trailer What is the maximum safe weight of a trailer It should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes But even that can be too heavy lt depends on how you plan to use your trailer For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important The ideal trailer weight can also depend on any special equip ment that you have on your vehicle Hi Ll ne r e o Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight C190E02JM E140602AEN Weight of the trailer tongue The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross vehicle weight GVW of your vehicle This weight includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will also be carrying that weight The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi mum of 10 of the total loaded traile
189. ght and narrower than 14 cm 6 in in diameter XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 42 AM Page 61 P Features of your vehicle Rear parking assist system pre cautions The rear parking assist system may not sound consistently depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged Any non factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor per formance The sensor may not recognize objects less than 40 cm 15 in from the sen sor or it may sense an incorrect dis tance Use caution When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow dirt or water the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth Do not push scratch or strike the sen sor Sensor damage could occur x NOTICE This system can only sense objects with in the range and location of the sensors It can not detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed Also small or slim objects such as poles or objects located between sensors may not be detected by the sensors Always visually check behind the vehi cle when backing up Be sure to inform any drivers of the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabili ties and limitations Self diagnosis If you don t hear an audible warning sound or if
190. hat phone again unless the phone is deleted manually from the audio sys tem refer Deleting Phone section or the _ vehicle s information is removed from the phone 1 Press button 2 Say Set Up The system replies with available commands To Arar information message press again and then a beep is heard 3 Say Pair Phone 4 Say Yes to proceed 5 Say the name of your phone when prompted Use any name to uniquely describe your phone XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page 2b Features of your vehicle 6 Bluetooth system will repeat the name you stated 7 Say Yes to confirm 8 The audio displays searching passkey 0000 and asks you to initiate pairing procedure from the phone 9 Search the Bluetooth system on your phone Your phone should display your vehicle model name on_ the Bluetooth device list Then attempt pairing on your phone 10 After Pairing is completed your phone will start to transfer phone contact list to the audio sys tem This process may take from a few minutes to over 10 minutes depend ing on the phone model and number of entries in the phone contact list By manual operation Select PAIR in PHONE menu then proceed from step 5 h o_o Note Until the audio displays Transfer Complete Bluetooth hands free feature may not be fully operational Note If the phone is paired to
191. he roof rails above the front and rear doors They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in cer tain side impact collisions XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 43 AM Page 58 Safety features of your vehicle C040800AAM Why didn t my air bag go off in a collision Inflation and non infla tion conditions of the air bag There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expect ed to provide additional protection These include rear impacts second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents as well as low speed impacts In other words just because your vehicle is damaged and even if it is totally unusable don t be surprised that the air bags did not inflate Air bag collision sensors 1 SRS control module 3 Side impact sensor Rollover sensor 4 Side impact sensor 2 Front impact sensor XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 43 AM Page 59 Safety features of your vehicle 1VQA2084 C040801AAM Front air bags Front air bags are designed to inflate ina frontal collision depending on the intensi ty soeed or angles of impact of the front collision So am SiS Air bag inflation conditions o gt XM CAN ENG 3 0 11726 2009 Safety features of your vehicle 11 43 AM Page 60 f A 7 j OXM039057 Side impact and or curtain air bags Side impact and or curtai
192. he sits properly sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator will turn off and the front passenger s air bag will be able to inflate if necessary in frontal crashes You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator on the center facia panel This system detects the conditions 1 4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly sitting upright with the seat in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfort ably extended feet on the floor and wearing the safety belt properly for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt e The ODS Occupant Detection System may not function properly if the passen ger takes actions which can defeat the detection system These include 1 Failing to sit in an upright position 2 Leaning against the door or center console 3 Sitting towards the sides or the front of the seat 4 Putting legs on the dashboard or rest ing them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat 5 Improperly wearing the safety belt 6 Reclining the seat back XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42
193. he vehicle is operated in severely air polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier When you replace the climate control air filter replace it per forming the following procedure and be careful to avoid damaging other compo nents Lag ISe OXM079015 B OXM079016 1 Open the glove box and remove the 2 With the glove box open remove the a support strap 1 stoppers on both sides So am Seis XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance S fo oxwo79017 3 Remove the climate control air filter case by pulling out both sides of the cover 10 58 AM Page 24 p ie op OXM079018N 4 Replace the climate control air filter 5 Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly x NOTICE When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly Otherwise the system may produce noise and the effec tiveness of the filter may be reduced XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 25 Maintenance WIPER BLADES 1JBA5122 G180100AUN Blade inspection NOTICE Commercial hot waxes applied by auto matic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the wind shield wipers Common sources of con tamination are insects tree sap and hot wa
194. heck the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses Replace any swollen or deterio rated hoses The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool If the coolant level is low add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion Bring the level to F but do not overfill If frequent additions are required see an authorized KIA dealer for a cooling system inspec tion G070101AHM Recommended engine coolant e Use only soft distilled water in the coolant mixture The engine in your vehicle has alu minum engine parts and must be pro tected by an ethylene glycol based coolant to prevent corrosion and freez ing DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant Do not use a solution that contains more than 60 antifreeze or less than 35 antifreeze which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution For mixture percentage refer to the fol lowing table Mixture Percentage volume Ambient Temperature Antifreeze 15 C 5F 35 25C 13F 40 ETF 45C 49F 60 40 XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 17 Maintenance G070200AHM Changing the coolant Have the coolant changed by an author ized KIA dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section CAUTION Put a thick cloth around the
195. hicle DEFROSTER 220000AUN CAUTION To prevent damage to the conduc tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window NOTICE If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield refer to Windshield defrosting and defogging in this sec tion OXM049137 OXM049138 OXM049210 Rear window defroster The defroster heats the window to remove frost fog and thin ice from the rear window while the engine is running To activate the rear window defroster press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window brush it off before oper ating the rear defroster The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off To turn off the defroster press the rear window defroster button again Outside rearview mirror defroster if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the out side rearview mirror defrosters they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster Wiper deicer if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the wiper deicer it will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster So am Ais XM CA
196. hicle cannot roll Then release the parking brake Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal This can cause the transaxle to overheat Always use the brake pedal or parking brake XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 39 Driving your vehicle CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED OXM059019N 1 Cruise indicator 2 Cruise set indicator E090000AAM EU The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a con stant speed without pressing the acceler ator pedal This system is designed to function above approximately 40 km h 25 mph A CAUTION During cruise speed driving of a manual transaxle vehicle do not shift into neutral without depress ing the clutch pedal since the engine will be overrevved If this happens depress the clutch pedal or release the cruise control ON OFF switch x NOTICE During normal cruise control operation when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds The delay is normal fe So ame iS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 40 P Driving your vehicle OXM059020N E090100AUN KM To set cruise control speed 1 Push the cruise ON OFF button on the steering wheel to turn the system on The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 2 Accelerate to the desir
197. ic transaxle Se ee re ee ee 5 15 Manual transaxle eee er eT ree re Ce ee 5 12 Warnings and indicators Te er ee ee ee 4 51 Trip computer steer eee teeter etter te tere teenetetees 4 47 Washer luidere emi ee 7 20 Tripmeter neeetetttettrtettrtertrtertrtererterestererterestenestesestenent 4 47 Weight glossary nerteeeeertetettetertettrtertetererteresteresterestene t 5 67 Base curb weight eeeeeeeeerteterterterterrtertettererterttertet 5 67 V Cargo Weight sss tense eeeeteseeneenennen 5 67 GAW Gross axle weight svt 5 67 Vehicle break in process TT ee ee ee ee 1 5 GAWR Gross axle weight rating E E T 5 67 Vehicle certification label E E E E 8 7 GVW Gross vehicle weight Tere Ce Tee re 5 67 Ig XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 10 Index GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating rrr 5 67 Vehicle curb weight POPS ere eeeeeeeerrererere naa a a ai 5 67 Wheel alignment and tire balance eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeseseeeeeee 7 35 Wheel replacement seessssosssoesssessesesssiessesessseeseeessssessssssssne 7 37 Windows Pree er eee rere reer eee eee eee eee rere errr reer ee eee ere reese eee eee ee eee ee 4 21 Auto up down window esessscsecooooosososcsccocooosssoossesecesoeoo 4 23 Power window lock button E E E E 4 24 Windshield defrosting and defogging cvevevevenenen 4 91 Defogging logic a E 4 93 Winter driving sosseosssecssosesesessssesossecsasenescessdeesesesossessssssscee 5 50 SNOW tireg teeeeeeereeeeereeeeeeeeseeseeecercecceceeesesserececeeceece
198. id resting your thumb or finger on the as the language could unintentionally change A CAUTION IN USING BLUETOOTH CELLU LAR PHONE Do not use a cellular phone or perform Bluetooth settings e g pairing a phone while driving Some Bluetooth enabled phones may not be recognized by the system or fully compatible with the system Before using Bluetooth related features of the audio system refer your phone s User s Manual for phone side Bluetooth opera tions The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth related features You will not be able to use the hands free feature when your phone in the car is outside of the cellular service area e g in a tunnel in a underground in a mountainous area etc If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice during a call Continued Continued Do not place the phone near or inside metallic objects otherwise Communications with Bluetooth system or cellular service sta tions can be disturbed While a phone is connected through Bluetooth your phone may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth related operations Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference noise or malfunction to audio system In this case storing the device in a different location may resolve the situation XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio
199. ies to the child So am SiS XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 42 Safety features of your vehicle When the ignition switch is turned ON the warning light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds then go off O Have the system checked if P e The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON e The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds e The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion e The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position S C041000AAM W7 147 The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air bag warning light gt ENG 3 0XP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 43 P Safety features of your vehicle 8 104217119E 5 9 3KOR5KAKO OXM039100N C040100AHM EU SRS components and functions The SRS consists of the following com ponents 1 Driver s front air bag module Passenger s front air bag module Side impact air bag modules Curtain air bag modules Retractor pre tensioner assemblies Air bag warning light SRS control module SRSCM Rollover sensor 8 Front impact sensors 9 Side impact sensors 10 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFP indi cator Front passenger s seat only N OF B W PO 11 Occupant detection system Front passenger s seat only 12
200. ight outboard seat ing positions Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH compatible attachments Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 39 Safety features of your vehicle AIR BAG ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM C040000AUN C1 1 Driver s front air bag 2 Passenger s front air bag 3 Side impact air bag 4 Curtain air bag The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration 3rd row seat if equipped OXM039101N XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 40 P Safety features of your vehicle C040900AHM EU How does the air bag system operate Air bags are activated able to inflate if necessary only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START position Air bags inflate instantly in the event of a serious frontal collision or side colli sion in order to help protect the occu pants from serious physical injury Also the side and or curtain air bags inflate instantly in the event of a rollover in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate Generally air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a col lision and its direction Thes
201. ill not operate But if all doors and tailgate are closed after the lock button is pressed the hazard warning lights will blink once D020102BHM EU Unlock 2 The driver s door is unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the driver s door is unlocked All doors and tailgate are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds The hazard warning lights will blink twice again to indicate that all doors and tailgate are unlocked After pressing this button the doors and tailgate will be locked automatically unless you open any door within 30 sec onds 2 stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the Lock 1 and Unlock 2 button for 4 sec onds disabling 2 stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The hazard warning lights will blink 4 times to indicate that 2 stage unlock was enabled D020105AHM Alarm 3 The horn sounds and the hazard warning lights blink for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for more than 0 5 sec onds To stop the horn and lights press any button on the transmitter XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 7 P Features of your vehicle DO20200AAM EC Transmitter precautions NOTICE The transmitter will not work if any of the following occurs e The ignition key is in the ignition switch e You exceed the opera
202. iller lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pressing the fuel filler lid opener button on the driver s door if equipped OXM049021 x NOTICE If the fuel filler lid does not open because ice has formed around it tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid Do not pry on the lid If necessary spray around the lid with an approved de icer fluid do not use radiator anti freeze or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt OAM049089 1 Stop the engine 2 To open the fuel filler lid push the fuel filler lid opener button if equipped 3 Pull open the fuel filler lid 1 4 To remove the cap turn the fuel filler cap 2 counterclockwise 5 Refuel as needed D100200AXM Closing the fuel filler lid 1 To install the cap turn it clockwise until it clicks This indicates that the cap is securely tightened 2 Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly making sure that it is securely closed x NOTICE There may be an intermittent noise near the refueling hole while the engine is idling if the fuel cap is not closed secure ly This occurs normally with the OBD system D100300AAM EU XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 28 Features of your vehicle WARNING Refueling dan gers Automotive fuels are flammable materials When refueling please note the following guidelines care fully Failure to f
203. intenance OHM078060 OHM078061 i 2 Lift up the wiper blade clip Then pull 3 Install the new blade assembly in the Rear window wiper blade an down the blade assembly and remove reverse order of removal 1 Raise the wiper arm and pull out the it wiper blade assembly XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 28 p Maintenance i OHM078063 2 Install the new blade assembly by J inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place 3 Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slight ly To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components have an authorized KIA dealer replace the wiper blade XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 29 Maintenance BATTERY OXM079100 G190100AAM EC zane For best battery service Keep the battery securely mounted Keep the battery top clean and dry Keep the terminals and connections clean tight and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease e Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time disconnect the bat tery cables XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 30 p Maintenance G190200AUN Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance free calcium based battery If the battery becomes discharged ina short time
204. ional tire and t0 420 kPa 60 psi sonal injury rim at the first opportunity NOTICE e Do not exceed the vehicle s maxi e The operation of this vehicle mum load rating or the load carry is not recommended with Check the inflation pressure after ing capacity shown on the sidewall more than one compact spare installing the spare tire Adjust it to of the compact spare tire tire in use at the same time the specified pressure as necessary e Avoid driving over obstacles The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a con ventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 25 mm 1 inch which could result in damage to the vehicle XM CAN Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the com pact spare tire is installed Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle The compact spare tire s tread life is shorter than a regular tire Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn com pact spare tires with the same size and design mounted on the same wheel ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 06 PM Page 15 The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels nor should standard tires snow tires wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel If such use is attempted damage to these items or other car compo nents may occur Do not use more than o
205. ions and changes are required e When the air flow rate suddenly decreases the system should be checked at an authorized KIA dealer Checking the amount of air con ditioner refrigerant and compres sor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low the performance of the air conditioning is reduced Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system Therefore if abnormal operation is found have the system inspected by an authorized KIA dealer x NOTICE It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used Otherwise damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 46 AM Page 83 Features of your vehicle AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED E Front climate control A C display Driver s temperature control knob AUTO automatic control button Front blower OFF button Front fan speed control switch Mode selection button Dual temperature control selection button Passenger s temperature control knob Air conditioning button 0 3rd row air conditioning ON OFF button controlled from the front or outside fresh air position button 11 Air intake control button or recirculated air position button 12 Front windshield defroster button 13 3rd row air conditioning fan speed con trol switch if equipped O O NOOA OUON The actual control panel in the vehicle
206. ired phone from the list 5 Say Yes to confirm 6 By manual operation Select DELETE in PHONE menu then select desired phone from the list ee XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ae Features of your vehicle e Changing Priority When several phones are paired to the audio system the system attempts to connect following order when the Bluetooth system is enabled 1 Priority checked phone 2 Previously connected phone 3 Gives up auto connection 1 Press button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Change Priority after prompt The system lists all the registered phone names 4 Say the name or number of desired phone from the list 5 Say Yes to confirm 6 By manual operation Select PRIORITY in PHONE menu then select desired phone from the list e Adjusting Bluetooth Volume Bluetooth system volume can be adjusted separately from main volume of the audio system Volume control is avail able by manual operation only Select BT VOL in PHONE menu adjust volume to desired level by turn ing the TUNE knob then press the knob again to confirm e Turning Bluetooth ON OFF Bluetooth system can be enabled ON or disabled OFF by this menu If Bluetooth is disabled all the com mands related to Bluetooth system prompts whether you wish to turn Bluetooth ON or not 1 Press button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Bluetooth Off a
207. ith the accelerator pedal depressed Never move the gear shift lever into P Park when the vehicle is in motion Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R Reverse or D Drive Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill This may be extremely hazardous Always leave the car in gear when moving Do not ride the brakes This can cause them to overheat and malfunc tion Instead when you are driving down a long hill slow down and shift to a lower gear When you do this engine braking will help slow down the car Slow down before shifting to a lower gear Otherwise the lower gear may not be engaged Always use the parking brake Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P Park to keep the vehicle from moving Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface Be especially careful when braking accelerating or shifting gears On a slippery surface an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelera tor pedal So am iS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 20 Driving your vehicle E060203AUN Moving up a steep grade from a stand ing start To move up a steep grade from a stand ing start depress the brake pedal shift the shift lever to D Drive Select the appropriate
208. itoring Module Audio Multifunction Switch Remocon MODULE 2 Rear Parking Assist Buzzer ICM Relay Box DBC Relay ESC Off Switch DBC Switch Steering Angle Sensor Alternator Smart Key Control Module A V amp Navigation Head Unit Rear Monitor IPM BCM IG1 Mopute1 i 108 Smart Key Control Module Rear Parking Assist Control Module E R Fuse amp Relay Box Fuse B UP LP ooa ae ECU 2 PDM 4WD ECM Instrument Cluster IND PODS Module Digital Clock E R Fuse amp Relay Box Relay Start Sub Start Burglar Alarm PDM ro WIPER AR w gt WIPER FRT E R Fuse amp Relay Box Wiper Low Relay Front Wiper Motor Multifunction Switch Wiper AUDIO 2 AMP Power Outside Mirror Switch Smart Key Control Module PDM Audio A V amp Navigation Head Unit Digital Clock IPM BCM ACC DVD Player Can Rear Monitor P OUTLET RR Rear Power Outlet P OUTLET FRT Driver Passenger Power Outlet MODULE 3 7 5A Not Used Front A C Control Module Active Incar Sensor Cluster lonize PDM ICM Relay Box Front Seat Warmer A CON Relay Rear A C Relay E R Fuse amp Relay Box Blower Relay Sunroof Motor Electro Chromic Mirror IPM BCM IG2 ee e rsa XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 11 00 AM Page 51 Maintenance Description Fuse rating Protected component B A HORN Burglar Alarm Horn Relay A CON REAR ICM Relay Box Rear A C Relay P WDW LH 25A Driver Power Window Relay Power Window Main Switch Rear Power Window Switch LH
209. just the position of the toward the rear of the vehicle left and right outside rearview mirrors To adjust the position of either mirror the ignition switch should be in the ACC posi tion Move the switch 1 to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to posi tion the selected mirror up down left or right After the adjustment put the switch into the neutral center position to prevent inadvertent adjustment So am is XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 44 Features of your vehicle INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1 Tachometer 2 Turn signal indicators 3 Speedometer 4 Engine temperature gauge aa 5 Warning and indicator lights wane 2 Reasons ae a 6 Shift position indicator a F Automatic transaxle only 7 Odometer Tripmeter 8 Trip computer SET CAUSE qay W Pa 9 Fuel gauge 3 if equipped The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OXM049050C 1 D150000AAM EU XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 45 Features of your vehicle D150100AAM EU Instrument panel illumination if equipped When the ignition switch is on press the illumination control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumi nation Sree 100 120 140 7 kmh 160 180 40 4 no 2007 _ w 220 240 hy 8 0 a 1
210. k the lap shoulder belts for wear and function Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts e Clean the body and door drain holes e Lubricate the door hinges and checks and hood hinges Lubricate the door and hood locks and latches Lubricate the door rubber weather strips Check the air conditioning system Check the power steering fluid level Inspect and lubricate the automatic transaxle linkage and controls Clean the battery and terminals Check the brake clutch fluid level XM CAN ENG 7 qgxp 5 10 2010 2 05 PM Page 7 Maintenance MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE G040100AXM EC Engine control system MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months whichever comes first MAINTENANCE 1000km _ 16 24 32 a0 ae 56 64 72 so a8 96 10a 112 120 128 TEM Monhs 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 Engine oil amp engine olltiter 1 Bh hh hh Drive belts tension O nnn O hm O Cooling system hoses amp connections fig f ot FL ot CL ETT e S Engine coolant o M A A e A i a A e a O A Fuel fiter nH o a b Fuel tank cap lines EVAP canister and hoses Pentti crs Fuel tank air fiter CCV fier s E e U E E m Air cleaner element gt ME a sai a HH En ES anton wires na nH HH a HH amp Spark plugs Replace every 160 000 km Idle speed nT n E A l M fhm Valve clearance E fn O O tT hm n eeneg e e e e a Transfer case fluid 4WDY TA O AA O OE S O
211. l a M o Seat belts buckles amp anchors EE En Eo EE EE EE Eo EE Lock hinges amp hood latch E if equipped eeneg m e e e e e XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 10 p Maintenance Chart symbols l Inspect these items and their related parts If necessary correct clean refill adjust or replace R Replace or change L Lubricate 1 Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner s Manual 2 More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions 3 More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions a Short distance driving b Driving on dusty roads c Extensive idling or slow speed driving in stop and go traffic 4 If necessary rotate and balance the wheels Note Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week oe oO XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 11 P Maintenance EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS G050100AHM Engine oil and filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions more frequent oil and filter changes are required G050200AUN Drive belts Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts cracks excessive wear or oil satu ration and replace if necessary Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension a
212. le switch The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked Also once the tailgate is opened and then closed the tailgate will lock auto matically D040104AHM Start up You can start the engine without inserting the key For detailed information refer to Starting the engine with a smart key in section 5 XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 11 P Features of your vehicle D040300AHM EC Smart key precautions X NOTICE If for some reason you happen to lose your smart key you will not be able to start the engine Tow the vehicle if necessary and contact an authorized KIA dealer A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle If you lose a smart key you should immedi ately take the vehicle and key to your authorized KIA dealer to protect it from potential theft The smart key will not work if any of the following occurs The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart key The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone Another vehicle s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle When the smart key does not work properly open and close the door with the mechanical key If you have a problem with the smart key contact an authorized KIA dealer CAUTION Keep the smart key aw
213. lect the lowest channel in highlighted category If channel is selected by selecting cat egory CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen INFO Selection Button Displays the information of the current channel as below when the button is pressed each time When default display is CAT CH Category Channel Artist Title Composer if available Category Channel When default display is ART TITLE Artist Titles Category Channel Composer if available Artist Titles If this message is displayed the anten na or antenna cable is broken or unplugged Please consult with your Kia dealership 2 Acquiring Signal If this message is displayed it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal is not available Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page zsh Features of your vehicle 4 CALL button Places and transfers calls 5 END button Ends calls or cancels functions BLUETOOTH PHONE OPERATION m What is Bluetooth Bluetooth is a wireless technology that allows multiple devices to be connected in a short range low powered devices like hands free stereo headset wireless remocon etc For more information visit the Bluetooth website at www Bluetooth com General Features e This audio system supports Bluetooth hands free and stereo headset fea tures
214. located on Securing a child restraint seat with the left and right 2nd row seat backs to child seat lower anchor system indicate the position of the lower anchors Some child seat manufacturers make for child restraints child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH compatible child restraint seats LATCH stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats So am Seis XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 38 Safety features of your vehicle Also test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it Tilt the seat from side to side Also try to tug the seat for ward Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place CAUTION Do not allow the rear seat belt web bing to get scratched or pinched by the child seat latch and LATCH anchor during the installation OXM039036N LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions Their locations are shown in the illustration There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the 2nd row seat left and r
215. lose Center console storage Glove box gt securely if equipped The glove box can be locked and To open the center console storage pull unlocked with a master key if equipped up the lever To open the glove box pull the handle and the glove box will automatically open Close the glove box after use gt To open the sunglass holder press the XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 48 AM Page 95 Features of your vehicle Large if equipped You can place small objects in the lug gage box with the cover closed or large objects in the luggage box with the cover off oy Aves aise i CAUTION To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage box OXM049175 Sunglass holder if equipped cover and the holder will slowly open Place your sunglasses with the lenses facing out To close the sunglass holder D270500BUN C1 push it up Luggage box Small You can place a first aid kit a reflector tri angle tools etc in the box for easy access Grasp the handle on the edge of the cover and lift it XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 49 AM Page 96 Features of your vehicle INTERIOR FEATURES D280300AXM E Front Cup holder Type A BDI OXM049240N OXM049214 D280301AHM Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10
216. mage Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary G052100AUN Suspension mounting bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage Retighten to the specified torque G052200AUN Steering gear box linkage amp boots lower arm ball joint With the vehicle stopped and engine off check for excessive free play in the steering wheel Check the linkage for bends or damage Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration cracks or damage Replace any damaged parts G052300AEN Power steering pump belt and hoses if equipped Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage Replace any damaged or leaking parts immedi ately Inspect the power steering belt or drive belt for evidence of cuts cracks excessive wear oiliness and proper ten sion Replace or adjust it if necessary G052400AUN Drive shafts and boots Check the drive shafts boots and clamps for cracks deterioration or damage Replace any damaged parts and if nec essary repack the grease G052500AUN Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and con nections for leakage and damage XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 14 Maintenance ENGINE OIL 3 Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes about 5 minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan 4 Pull the dipstick out wipe it clean
217. maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maxi mum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per missible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg 150 pounds XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 43 Maintenance Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a par ticular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommend ed tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seat ed Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed
218. ming your hand held transmitter may automatically stop trans mitting Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note steps 2 through 4 in the Programming portion of this text while you press and re press cycle your handheld transmitter every two sec onds until the frequency signal has been learned The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several sec onds upon successful training A CAUTION If programming a garage door opener or gate it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possi ble motor burn up Accessories If you would like additional information on the HomeLink Wireless Control System HomeLink compatible products or to purchase other accessories such as the HomeLink Lighting Package please contact HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com FCC ID NZLZTVHL3 IC 4112A ZTVHL3 This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Sa am SiS XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 42 Features of your vehicle D140200AHM EU Outside rearview mirror 4 CAUTION Be sure to adjust the mirror angles Do not scrape ice off the mirror before driving fa
219. n air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision Also the side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor Although the front air bags drivers and front passenger s air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions they also may inflate in other types of colli sions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact Side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions or rollovers But they may inflate in other type of collisions or similar rollover situations including when the vehicle is tilted such as being towed if the side impact sensors or rollover sensor detect a sufficient impact or rollover If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads the air bags may deploy Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment l 1 1VQA2086 C040802AUN Air bag non inflation conditions e In certain low speed collisions the air bags may not deploy The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions XM CAN ENG 3 0 11726 2009 11 43 AM Page 61 Safety features of your
220. n cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror It may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing oD XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 37 Features of your vehicle Glare detection sensor A Rear view display Indicator light if equipped Indicator OAM049025 To operate the electric rearview mirror e The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned on Press the ON OFF button 1 to turn the automatic dimming function off The mirror indicator light will turn off Press the ON OFF button 1 to turn the automatic dimming function on The mirror indicator light will illuminate A CAUTION If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the rear window the electric rearview mirror may not work prop erly Gale Ele alee 0 OHD046025N Electrochromic mirror with HomeLink system if equipped To operate the electric rearview mirror Press the button 1 to turn the auto matic dimming function on The mirror indicator light will illuminate Press the O button 2 to turn the auto matic dimming function off The mirror indicator light will turn off Homelink buttons OHD046305N HomeLink Wireless Control System Your new mirror comes with an integrat ed HomeLink Universal Transceiver which allows you to program
221. nce the last average speed reset Even if the vehicle is not in motion the average speed keeps going while the engine is running Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second when the average speed is being displayed or after the engine stops and 2 hours elapsed clears the average speed to zero OXM049068C Driving time This mode indicates the total time trav eled since the last driving time reset Even if the vehicle is not in motion the driving time keeps going while the engine is running The meters working range is from 0 00 99 59 Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second when the driving time is being displayed or after the engine stops and 2 hours elapsed clears the driving time to zero 0 00 OXM049070N ECOMINDER INDICATOR ECO ON OFF mode if equipped You can turn the ECOMINDER indica tor which is identified on your instrument dashboard by the ECO name on off on the instrument cluster in this mode If you push the TRIP button more than 1 second in the ECOMINDER indicator ECO ON mode then ECO OFF is dis played in the screen and the ECO indica tor turns off If you want to display the ECOMINDER indicator ECO again press the TRIP but ton more than 1 second in the ECO OFF mode and then ECO ON mode is dis played in the screen When you press the TRIP button less than 1 second in the ECO mode the mode is changed to odometer XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP
222. nd adjusted as neces sary GO50300AUN Fuel filter cartridge A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting If an exces sive amount of foreign matter accumu lates in the fuel tank the filter may require replacement more frequently After installing a new filter run the engine for several minutes and check for leaks at the connections Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized KIA dealer G050400AUN EU Fuel lines fuel hoses and con nections Check the fuel lines fuel hoses and con nections for leakage and damage Have an authorized KIA dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately G050500AUN Timing belt if equipped Inspect all parts related to the timing belt for damage and deformation Replace any damaged parts immediately GO50600AUN Vapor hose and fuel filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced G050700AUN Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and or mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and excessive swelling indi cate deterioration Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose Surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as
223. nd to select any mode as follows Tripmeter A OXM049061C Odometer The odometer indicates the total dis tance the vehicle has been driven You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed See Maintenance section 7 Y ECOMINDER INDICATOR ECO ON OFF mode NOTICE It is unlawful to alter the odometer of all vehicles with the intent to change the if equipped mileage registered on the odometer The alteration may void your warranty cov erage en 448 OXM049062C Tripmeter TRIP A Triometer A TRIP B Triometer B This mode indicates the distance of indi vidual trips selected since the last trip meter reset The meter s working range is from 0 0 to 999 9 km 0 0 to 999 9 miles Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second when the tripmeter TRIP A or TRIP B is being displayed clears the tripmeter to zero 0 0 XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 49 P Features of your vehicle OXM049063C OXM049064C Distance to empty km or mi This mode indicates the estimated dis tance to empty based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel delivered to the engine When the remaining distance is below 50 km 30 miles will be displayed and the dis tance to empty indicator RANGE will blink until the vehicle is refueled The meter s working range is from 50 to 990 km 3
224. ndow detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 2 5 cm 1 in And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the auto matic window reversal feature the auto matic window reversal will not operate x NOTICE The automatic reverse feature for the driver s window is only active when the auto up feature is used by fully pulling up the switch The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway posi tion on the power window switch XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 24 Features of your vehicle CAUTION e To prevent possible damage to the power window system do not open or close two windows or more at the same time This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse Never try to operate the main switch on the driver s door and the individual door window H JE O S amp switch in the opposite directions i OXM049018 at the same time If this is done D080104AAM the window will stop and cannot an Power window lock button be opened or closed e The driver can disable the power win dow switches on the passenger doors by pressing the power window lock but ton located on the driver s door to the LOCK position pressed e When the power window lock button is in the LOCK
225. ne compact spare tire at a time Do not tow a trailer while the com pact spare tire is installed What to do in an emergency XM CAN What to do in an emergency ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 TOWING dolly OXM069028 F080100AAM EU Towing service If emergency towing is necessary we recommend having it done by an author ized KIA dealer or a commercial tow truck service Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended For trailer towing guidelines information refer to Trailer towing in section 5 12 06 PM Page 16 P On 4WD vehicles your vehicle must be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatoed equipment with all the wheels off the ground A CAUTION The 4WD vehicle should never be towed with the wheels on the ground This can cause serious damage to the transaxle or the 4WD system On 2WD vehicles it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground without dollies and the front wheels off the ground If any of the loaded wheels or suspen sion components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground use a towing dolly under the front wheels When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used the front of the vehicle should always be lift ed not the rear XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11726 2009 12 06
226. ne es 5 35 14 Steering wheel tilt control 2 cc0000 4 35 15 Ste MING wheel Tan enna ote a 4 34 TOFU SE DOK oa tee ten tet caret as TE EEE rsh age 7 45 17 Hood release lever cceeceseeseeeessreeeereees 4 25 te Sere oR ei ae ue AS E EAE oh cnn rein neat eat 3 2 LDA VOUS Ste eh a eee oh yh lon each ah Oso 4 77 4 86 If equipped OXMO019001N XM CAN ENG 2 QXP 11 26 2009 11 35 AM Page 3 Your vehicle at a glance INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW 1 lnstrument cl ster lt a 4 44 2 Lighting controls Turn signals 4 63 3 Steering wheel audio controls 4 102 A AOI eect tan E P ews arpa vere ate eee ees 4 35 5 Drivers front air DAG aes eeeeee ee 3 51 6 Cruise controls carer se nee eee 539 7 Wiper Washer switch c 4 68 8 Ignition switch or ENGINE START STOP button 5 4 5 7 On DIG tA ClO CK oir ce cee E R 4 98 TO AUG ose ee eee ee ae 4 102 11 Hazard warning flasher 4 62 6 2 12 Climate control system 4 74 4 83 13 Seat heater switch eee 3 9 TADPOWEROUICTE pace tees ae 4 97 15 AUX USB and iPod port vice 4 103 16 Shift levet ee eee 5 12 5 15 17 Parking brake pedal oe 1S Brake pedal orrn acre se 5 27 19 Accelerator pedal ccccscceseeeees 5 5 20 Passenger s front air bag 35l ZAP GIOVE DOX oe ere meee 4 94 If equipped The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may di
227. neteeeneneneeneneee 4 96 Highway driving creer eee eseseseteneneneneneneenees 5 49 Floor mat anchor s sreseeee sees esses eseeeeeeee estes 4 99 SEO E ee 5 54 Luggage net holders errrrrreeereteterereettiteeneee 4 99 HomeLink Electrochromic mirror E T 4 37 Power outlet a a a a a E sees a T a A 4 97 Hood T E A a A T A a E E I eee 4 25 Sunvisor ee ee E eee 4 97 Gai ee ee A 35 Interior lights s teeters tee te teeter teeters ee neeees 4 71 How to use this Manual eeeeeeeeeeeeeeererereeeeeeeeeceerereeereereeeees 1 2 Interior OVELVICW ttseeereeeeererrereeeeereeeeeeecccceceeccereeerereeeeeeeeees 2 2 Interlock system E a E T E A A 0 dete E E T 5 19 XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 6 Index Key positions Leh baddidlaeenGeeGeerceaeebinees ont gaceetee endear ed ces eeeeseseeeade 5 4 Keys cuviccetedeune dees beens e eas E icusdeeneaiewanes iene E E 4 2 Immobilizer system E E E ET 4 3 L Label Air bag warning label E E E E SOE E T E KOE 3 65 Certification label E E E E E E 5 65 Tire and loading information label eeeeeeeeerereeee 5 62 Tire sidewall labeling E E eia e Sis Gio e eis ere 8 SiS E E wie sale cele 7 38 Tire specification and pressure labelssessssrsrsrssnrsrssirerns 8 8 Vehicle certification label E A E T amp 7 Latch system see lower anchor system 22929822 3 37 Lighting AE EET E bose E T E E 4 63 B attery saver function AA E A E A A E E 4 63 Headlight escort function E E T E T A ein G s 4 63 Lower an
228. ng modifica tions to the vehicle for persons with disabilities which modifications may affect the vehicle s advanced air bag system However KIA does not endorse nor will it support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the advanced air bag system including the occupant detection system Specifically the front passenger seat dashboard or door should not be replaced except by an author ized KIA dealer using original KIA parts designed for this vehicle and model Any other such replacement or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags For the same reason do not attach anything to the seat dashboard or door even temporarily If the system is adversely affected it could cause severe personal injuries or death in a collision visor Advanced air bags are combined with pre tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes Front air bags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection can be pro vided by the pre tensioner seat belt WARNING Always use seat belts and child restraints every trip every time everyone Air bags inflate with con siderable force and in the blink of an eye Seat belts help keep occu pants in proper position to obtain maximum benefit from the air bag Even with advanced air bags improperly and unbelted occupants can be
229. nition switch is ON or all doors are locked the light will turn off immediate ly If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position the light stays on for about 20 minutes However if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position the light stays on continuously So am Ais XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 43 AM Page 72 Features of your vehicle OXM049130 HENE OXM049241N Map lamp Luggage lamp if equipped Vanity mirror lamp if equipped P e Push the lens to turn the map lampon DOOR The light comes on when the The lamp will turn on if this but or off This light produces a spot beam tailgate is opened ton is pressed for convenient use as a map lamp at OFF The light stays off at all times The lamp will turn off if this but night or as a personal lamp for the driv ON The light stavs on at all times d g y ton is pressed er and the front passenger e The light comes on when any door is opened or the ignition switch is turned NOTICE OFF if equipped Turn off the lamp before return the sun The light goes out gradually after visor to its original position approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed or the ignition switch is turned OFF However if all doors are locked or the ignition switch is turned ON the light will turn off immediately XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 43 AM Page 73 P Features of your ve
230. ns Do not apply volatile agents such as benzene and thinner normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for ana logue disc onto CDs To prevent the disc surface from get ting damaged Hold and carry CDs by the edges or the edges of the center hole only Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft cloth before playback wipe it from the center to the outside edge Do not damage the disc surface or attach pieces of sticky tape or paper onto it Make sure objects other than CDs are not inserted into the CD player Do not insert more than one CD at a time e Keep CDs in their cases after use to protect them from scratches or dirt e Depending on the type of CD R CD RW CDs certain CDs may not operate normally according to manufacturing companies or making and recording methods In such circumstances if you still continue to use those CDs they may cause the malfunction of your vehicle audio system NOTICE Playing an Incompatible Copy Protected Audio CD Some copy protected CDs which do not comply with the international audio CD standards Red Book may not play on your vehicle audio Please note that if you try to play copy protected CDs and the CD player does not perform correct ly the CDs maybe defective not the CD player So am eis XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio gxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page eh Features of your vehicle RADIO SET UP VOLUME CONTROL PA710XM USA CANADA SIRIUSA Buetooth ES
231. nt seatback to the upright position and if necessary slide the front seat forward 3 Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position OCM030065N 6 Also unfold the headrest manually 7 Return the rear seat belt to the proper position OXM039024N 4 Pull on the seatback folding lever then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle 5 When you return the seatback to its upright position always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback ae 2nd row right seat if equipped XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 40 AM Page 13 Safety features of your vehicle 1 As OXM039023N Double folding Pull the double folding strap on the right rear seatback then pull up the rear of the portion seat cushion toward the front of the vehicle When you return the seat cushion to its original position always be sure it has locked into position by pulling the rear portion of the seat cushion XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 40 AM Page 14 Safety features of your vehicle OXM039025N 3rd row seat if equipped 4 To use the rear seat lift and pull the Zao 1 Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the seatback backward by pulling on the pocket between the rear seatback and folding strap Pull the seatback firmly cushion and insert the rear seat belt until it clicks into place Make sure the webbing into the guide to prevent the seatback is locked
232. o overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one Worn old tires can cause acci dents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them G200300AUN Checking tire inflation pressure Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire G200301AUN How to check Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 6 km 1 mile XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 34 Maintenance Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gauge firm ly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label no further adjust ment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the rec ommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and mois ture G200400AUN Tire rot
233. o the wiper blades do not use gasoline kerosene paint thinner or other solvents on or near them To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components do not attempt to move the wipers manually OFF Wiper is not in operation XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 INTERIOR LIGHTS D210000AEN J CAUTION Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running It may cause battery discharge Automatic turn off function if equipped The interior lights automatically turn off approximately 20 minutes after the igni tion switch is turned off if the lights are in the ON position If your vehicle is equipped with the theft alarm system the interior lights automat ically turns off approximately 3 seconds after the system is armed stage 10 43 AM Page 71 P D210200AXM EU Room lamp The light will turn on and off as below if the switch is pressed The light will turn off if the button is pressed again Features of your vehicle e ON The light stays on at all times e DOOR The light comes on when any door or tailgate is opened regardless of the ignition switch position When doors are unlocked by the transmitter or the key is removed from the ignition switch the light comes on for approximately 30 sec onds as long as any door is not opened The light goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed However if the ig
234. oeoo 4 13 Antenna sseeeeeeeeeeeereeeerererereesereesesereressererecossereseeseeeoeeesere 4 102 Anti lock brake system AB S Pere rere errr reer ere eee eee eee eee errr 5 30 Appearance ors k oe re 7 54 Exterior CAFE ttteeereeeeererecreceereseeereerecereeceeeeeseeseereereeeceee 7 54 Interior CALE tterereererrererereereeereeceeeeseeeseereereecceceeseeseeereee 7 59 Armrest Mace 3 18 Audio system eee ree ere reer ere ree ee eee ee eee eee eee reer ere eee ee eee ee eee 4 102 Antenna ssteeeerereeeereeeeeerereeeseeereesesereceesererecsseeeeoesesereee 4 102 Steering wheel audio control eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeee 4 102 Auto lock mode Passenger seat belt svete 3 34 Automatic climate control system sas raterel A sie ewieceserers NET 4 83 Air conditioning Cee ec nen enceseseseececes sees eee ee eneneeseseseseseseese 4 89 Automatic heating and air conditioning 4 84 Manual heating and air conditioning 0eeeeeeen ene 4 85 Automatic transaxle aba ea ei n on 0 EE E crerece ie wis eie eros eis swusie ewer 5 1 5 Ignition key interlock system fa wiaveiere ares 8 e ereso e eie sia e avere cra eieisiaveiee e 5 19 Shift lock system E E E ET 5 18 Sports mode ei aibsalasaiosane die eevee lve we oce eciatete s eeie ule EE eae cisleg aoe eae enw steals 5 17 P Battery EIE EAE A E E E E E E E E oielee ie wee s 7 29 B attery saver function E E EEE T E E 4 63 Before driving EE L A a E E A sie wee T 5 3 Bottle holders see cup hol
235. of fluid A few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake clutch system can damage brake clutch system parts XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 57 AM Page 19 Maintenance POWER STEERING FLUID bd sponte G090100AHM Checking the power steering fluid level With the vehicle on level ground check the fluid level in the power steering reser voir periodically The fluid should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir at the normal tem perature Before adding power steering fluid thor oughly clean the area around the reser voir cap to prevent power steering fluid contamination If the level is low add fluid to the MAX level x NOTICE Check that the fluid level is in the HOT range on the reservoir If the fluid is cold check that it is in the COLD range In the event the power steering system requires frequent addition of fluid the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized KIA dealer CAUTION e To avoid damage to the power steering pump do not operate the vehicle for prolonged periods with a low power steering fluid level e Never start the engine when the reservoir tank is empty e When adding fluid be careful that dirt does not get into the tank e Too little fluid can result in increased steering effort and or noise from the power steering system e The use of the non specified fluid could reduce the effectiveness of the power s
236. ollow these guide lines may result in severe personal injury severe burns or death by fire or explosion e Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station facility Before refueling note the loca tion of the Emergency Gasoline Shut Off if available at the gas station facility Before touching the fuel nozzle you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity dis charge by touching another metal part of the vehicle a safe dis tance away from the fuel filler neck nozzle or other gas source Continued Continued e Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching rubbing or sliding against any item or fab ric polyester satin nylon etc capable of producing static elec tricity Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning If you must re enter the vehicle you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity dis charge by touching a metal part of the vehicle away from the fuel filler neck nozzle or other gaso line source When using an approved portable fuel container be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire Once refueling has begun contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete Continued Continued Use only approv
237. on struction G201005AUN 5 Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure 7 40 6 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire G2010007AEN EC 7 Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maxi mum section width For example TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A The tread wear grade is a compara tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern ment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half times 1 as well on the gov ernment course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate These grades are molded on the side walls of passenger vehicle tires The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle
238. on for less than 0 8 seconds and press again within 1 second to play the previous song Press TRACK V button for 0 8 sec onds or longer to initiate reverse direc tion high speed sound search Press TRACK button for less than 0 8 seconds to play the next song Press TRACK button for 0 8 sec onds or longer to initiate forward direc tion high speed sound search 5 RANDOM Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 sec onds to activate RDM mode and more than 0 8 seconds to activate ALL RDM mode e RDM Only files tracks in a folder disc are played back in a random sequence e ALL RDM MP3 WMA Only All files in a disc are played back in the random sequence 6 REPEAT Button Press this button for less than 0 8 sec onds to activate RPT mode and more than 0 8 seconds to activate FLD RPT mode e RPT Only a track file is repeatedly played back e FLD RPT MP3 WMA Only Only files are repeatedly played back 7 CD Indicator When car ignition switch is ACC or ON and if the CD is loaded this indicator is lit If the CD is ejected the light is turned off 8 SCAN Play Button Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds To cancel SCAN Play press this button again 9 INFO Button Displays the information of the current song Audio CD Disc Title Artist Track Title Artist Total Track XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page mad Features of yo
239. on may vary by product brand If there is diffi culty locating the learn or smart but ton reference the device s owners manual or contact HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 5 Press and release the learn or smart button on the device s motor head unit You have 30 seconds to complete step number 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button up to three times The rolling code equipped device should now recognize the HomeLink signal and activate when the HomeLink button is pressed The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not previously been done Refer to the Programming portion of this text ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 40 Features of your vehicle Operating HomeLink Flashing Reprogramming a single HomeLink To operate simply press the pro button grammed HomeLink button Activation To program a device to HomeLink using will now occur for the trained product a HomeLink button previously trained garage door security system entry door follow these steps lock estate gate or home or office light 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink ing For convenience the hand held button Do NOT release until step 4 transmitter of the device may also be has been completed used at any time The HomeLink 2 When the indicator light begins to flash Wireless Controls System onc
240. one incorrectly Therefore to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery follow these jump starting proce dures If in doubt we strongly recom mend that you have a competent techni wa cian or towing service jump start your Discharged vehicle Booster battery battery E DNEGA A caution F040000AUN rs only a 12 volt ise system an Connect cables in numerical order and e rte ae gA a a disconnect in reverse order 1 19 ystem electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24 volt power supply either two 12 volt batteries in series or a 24 volt motor generator set XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 5 P What to do in an emergency F040101ASA Jump starting procedure 1 Make sure the booster battery is 12 volt and that its negative terminal is grounded 2 lf the booster battery is in another vehicle do not allow the vehicles to come in contact 3 Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 1 then connect the other end to the positive terminal of the booster battery 2 Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative ter minal of the booster battery 3 then the other end to a solid stationary metallic point for example the engine lifting bracket away
241. or waxy film they should be cleaned with a glass cleaner Follow the directions on the glass cleaner con tainer CAUTION Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window This may result in damage of the rear window defroster grid So am Seis XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 11 00 AM Page 60 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM G270000AHM EU The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty Please see the warranty infor mation contained in the Warranty amp Maintenance booklet in your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an emis sion control system to meet all applicable emission regulations There are three emission control sys tems as follows 1 Crankcase emission control system 2 Evaporative emission control system 3 Exhaust emission control system In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems it is rec ommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an author ized KIA dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test With Electronic Stability Control ESC system e To prevent the vehicle from misfir ing during dynamometer testing turn the Electronic Stability Control ESC system off by pressing the ESC switch e After dynamometer testing is com pleted turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again
242. ore cur rent song To play the displayed song press the knob e Pressing this knob without turning enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode 8 FOLDER Moving Button e Press FOLDER V button to move to child folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder Press TUNE ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed It will play the first song in the folder Press FOLDER button to move to parent folder display the first song in the folder Press TUNE ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed So am isl XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page mad Features of your vehicle iPod PA710XM USA CANADA SIRIUS Btietooth 1 iPod Selection Button 2 TRACK Selection Button 3 REPEAT Selection Button 4 RANDOM Playback Button 5 INFO Button b SETUP P 6 SEARCH Knob amp ENTER Button INFO POWER ENTER sn F a 7 iPod category Selection Button 1 as 7 CAT SCAN MUTE veo tee A VOLUME iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page med Features of your vehicle NOTICE FOR USING iPod Continued DEVICE Some iPod models might not sup port the communication protocol and the files will not be played Supported iPod models iPod Mini iPod 4th Photo 6th Classic generation iPod Nano 1st 4th generation iPod Touch 1st 2nd generation The order of search or play
243. osest to the tire you are changing Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame OAM069009 Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground This measurement is approximately 3 cm 1 in Before removing the wheel lug nuts make sure the vehicle is sta ble and that there is no chance for movement or slippage 9 Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away To put the wheel on the hub pick up the spare tire line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them If this is difficult tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can slide over the other studs XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 06 PM Page 12 What to do in an emergency 10 To install the wheel hold it on the studs put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again 11 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise OQUN047019 Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an e
244. osition E030201AUN LOCK The steering wheel locks to protect against theft if equipped The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position E030202AHM ACC Accessory The steering wheel is unlocked and elec trical accessories are operative x NOTICE If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension E030203AUN ON The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started This is the normal running position after the engine is started Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 5 Driving your vehicle E030204APB START Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine The engine will crank until you release the key then it returns to the ON position The brake warning light can be checked in this posi tion E040100AUN Starting the engine E030205AHM Sam Sins XM CAN Driving your vehicle ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Make sure the parking brake is applied Manual Transaxle Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal dep
245. ossible Close the window to elim inate surrounding noise traffic noise vibration sounds etc which may dis turb recognizing the voice command correctly Speak a command after a beep sound within 5 seconds Otherwise the com mand will not be received properly Speak in a natural voice without paus ing between words E Information Display lt Active Call gt XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ad Features of your vehicle lt Recognization gt The Bluetooth icon appears on the upper side of audio display when a phone is connected m Phone Setup All Bluetooth related operations can be performed by voice command or by man ual operation By Voice Command Press button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition By Manual Operation 1 Push the SETUP button to enter SETUP mode 2 Select PHONE item by rotating the TUNE knob then push the knob 3 Select desired item by rotating the TUNE knob then push the knob e Pairing phone Before using Bluetooth features the phone must be paired registered to the audio system Up to 5 phones can be paired with the system Note The pairing procedure of the phone varies according to each phone model Before attempting to pair phone please see your phone s User s Guide for instructions Note Once pairing with the phone is com pleted there is no need to pair with t
246. other electrical com ponents do not work and the fuses are OK check the fuse panel in the engine compartment If a fuse is blown it must be replaced XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 59 AM Page 47 Maintenance x NOTICE e If the memory fuse is pulled out from the fuse panel the warning chime audio clock and interior lamps etc will not operate Some items must be reset after replacement Refer to Battery in this section e Even though the memory fuse is pulled out the battery can still be dis charged by operation of the head a i lights or other electrical devices elle OXM079022 G210101AHM C1 G210200AHM as Memory fuse Engine compartment fuse Your vehicle is equipped with a memory replacement fuse to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods 1 Turn off the engine 2 Turn off the headlights and tail lights 3 Open the driver s side panel cover and pull out the memory fuse 1 Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off 2 Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover Up XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 59 AM Page 48 p Maintenance 3 Check the removed fuse replace it if it NOTICE is blown To remove or insert the fuse If the multi fuse is blown consult an use the fuse puller in the engine com au
247. our vehicle The fol lowing explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean Example tire size designation These numbers are provided as an example only your tire size designa tor could vary depending on your vehicle P235 65R17 108T P Applicable vehicle type tires marked with the prefix P are intended for use on passenger vehicles or light trucks however not all tires have this marking 235 Tire width in millimeters 65 Aspect ratio The tire s section height as a percentage of its width R Tire construction code Radial 17 Rim diameter in inches 108 Load Index a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry T Speed Rating Symbol See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor tant information that you need if you ever have to replace one The follow ing explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designa tion mean Example wheel size designation 7 0JX17 7 0 Rim width in inches J Rim contour designation 17 Rim diameter in inches ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 39 Maintenance Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire This symbol
248. ping a straight line Move cautiously off the road to a safe place 2 Turn on your emergency flashers 3 Try to start the engine again If your vehicle will not start contact an authorized KIA dealer or seek other qualified assistance IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START FO030100AAM If engine doesn t turn over or turns over slowly 1 If your car has an automatic transaxle be sure the shift lever is in N Neutral or P Park and the emergency brake is set 2 Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight 3 Turn on the interior light If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter the battery is discharged 4 Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened 5 Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it See instructions for Jump starting FO30200AHM If engine turns over normally but does not start 1 Check the fuel level 2 With the ignition switch in the LOCK position check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark plugs Reconnect any that may be discon nected or loose 3 Check the fuel line in the engine com partment 4 If the engine still does not start call an authorized KIA dealer or seek other qualified assistance fe So am Seis XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 4 What to do in an emergency EMERGENCY STARTING Jumper Cables N F040100AHM U1 we Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if d
249. position pressed the drivers master control cannot operate the passenger door power windows XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 25 Features of your vehicle an cal 85 OXM049020 ji OXM049019 wiii l oxm049236N D090100AUN U1 2 Go to the front of the vehicle raise the 3 Pull out the support rod from the sup Zane Opening the hood hood slightly pull the secondary latch port rod holder 1 Pull the release lever to unlatch the 1 inside of the hood center and lift 4 Place the support rod end in the desig hood The hood should pop open the hood 2 nated hole on the underside of the slightly hood to hold up the hood ne place XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 26 Features of your vehicle D090200AAM Closing the hood 1 Before closing the hood check the fol lowing All filler caps in the engine compart ment must be correctly installed e Gloves rags or any other com bustible material must be removed from the engine compartment 2 Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling 3 Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm 1 ft above the closed position and let it drop Make sure that it locks into XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 39 AM Page 27 P Features of your vehicle FUEL FILLER LID if equipped pee D100100AXM Opening the fuel filler lid The fuel f
250. pped To turn on the 3rd row air conditioning control system 1 Press the 3rd row air conditioning ON OFF button located on the front climate control panel and set the fan speed to the desired speed with the 3rd row fan speed switch indicator light on the ON OFF button A C will illuminate 2 To turn off the 3rd row air conditioning control system press the 3rd row air conditioning ON OFF button A C once more located on the front climate con trol panel or set the fan speed to the OFF position with the 3rd row fan speed switch indicator light on the ON OFF button A C is not illuminat ed XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 45 AM Page 80 Features of your vehicle System operation Ventilation 1 Set the mode to the 8 position 2 Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position 3 Set the temperature control to the desired position 4 Set the fan speed control to the desired speed Heating 1 Set the mode to the 4 amp 8 position 2 Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position 3 Set the temperature control to the desired position 4 Set the fan speed control to the desired speed 5 If dehumidified heating is desired turn the air conditioning system if equipped on e If the windshield fogs up set the mode to the 34 or 447 position Operation Tips e To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ven
251. qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page no Features of your vehicle E Voice Recognition Activation e The voice recognition engine contained in the Bluetooth System can be activat ed in the following conditions Button Activation The voice recognition system will be active when the L amp J button is pressed and after the sound of a Beep Active Listening The voice recognition system will be active for a period of time when the Voice Recognition system has asked for a customer response The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine while number greater than ten will not be recognized If the command is not recognized the system will announce Pardon or No input voice signal from microphone No response e The system shall cancel voice recogn tion mode in following cases When pressing the button and saying cancel following the beep When not making a call and pressing the button When voice recognition has failed 3 consecutive times e At any time if you say help the system will announce what commands are available Menu tree The menu tree identifies available voice recognition Bluetooth functions Select phone Delete phone Bluetooth off Phonebook Delete name By number E Voice Operation Tip To get the best performance out of the Voice Recognition System observe the followings Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as p
252. r weight within the limits of the maximum permissible trailer tongue load After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trail er and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 03 PM Page 61 Driving your vehicle XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 03 PM Page 62 Driving your vehicle VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPALITY MHFE IE PLACES Ta wahine ighi af comparte and carga should never excec Le poids total des occupants t du chargesent ne doll jamais i 4 ig TIR SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE ne TAA 33psi INF OXM059100N TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY FRONT ER mEn UUS jaa e 7 The combined eight ef socupants ard cargo Sold wiped te or gg Le poids total des occupants et du aT na dolt jamais dipaer g OXM059101N E150100AUN Tire and loading information label TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT FRONT FER ft TOTAL F AVANT 2 inie 5 The combined weight of occupants ond cargo should newer amceed pe kbp or lbs Le poids tatal des occupants et du chargesent ne doit et e i s a ADO P235 65R17 230kPa aapi es P235 65R17 230kPa 33psi Ti65I90R17
253. r case oil 0 6 0 63 US qt HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL 5 SAE 75W 90 4WD 0 7 1 0 74 US qt SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent 68 17 96 US gal Refer to Fuel requirements in section 1 1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available Along with other additional benefits they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction Often these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving but in a year s time they can offer significant cost and energy savings 3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country you are able to use API service SL AT Automatic transaxle So am SiS XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 6 P Specifications amp Consumer information 1040000AAM EU Recommended SAE viscosity number J CAUTION Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug drain plug or dipstick before checking or drain ing any lubricant This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged Engine oil viscosity thickness has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating engine start and engine oil flowability Lower viscosity engine oils
254. r compart ment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected Outside fresh air position m Type A m With the outside fresh air position selected air c enters the vehicle from out side and is heated or cooled according to the function selected NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position without air conditioning selected may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compart ment may become stale In addition prolonged use of the air con ditioning with the recirculated air posi tion selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment OXM049148 Fan speed control The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system To change the fan speed turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed Setting the fan speed control knob to the 0 position turns off the fan XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 45 AM Page 79 Features of your vehicle OXM049149 Air conditioning B Press the A C button to turn the air con ditioning system on indicator light will illuminate Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off OXM049211 3rd row air conditioning if equi
255. r fluid leaks 3 Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly Have the vehicle towed to any author ized KIA dealer for a brake system inspection and necessary repairs Your vehicle is equipped with dual diago nal braking systems This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail With only one of the dual systems working more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle Also the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working If the brakes fail while you are driving shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do SO To check bulb operation check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 55 P Features of your vehicle D150312AAM Shift pattern indicator K Gap IM This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift position is selected C This warning light indicates a malfunction of either the generator or electrical charging system If the warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion 1 Drive to the nearest safe location 2 With the engine off check the genera tor drive belt for looseness or b
256. r than necessary If you are waiting and not in traffic turn off your engine and restart only when you re ready to go So am Ai XM CAN Driving your vehicle ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 e Remember your vehicle does not require extended warm up After the engine has started allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac ing the vehicle in gear In very cold weather however give your engine a Slightly longer warm up period Don t lug or over rev the engine Lugging is driving too slowly in a very high gear resulting in engine bucking If this happens shift to a lower gear Over revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit This can be avoid ed by shifting at the recommended speed 12 02 PM Page 44 P Use your air conditioning sparingly The air conditioning system is operat ed by engine power so your fuel econ omy is reduced when you use it Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds To help offset some of this loss slow down when driving in these conditions Keeping a vehicle in good operating con dition is important both for economy and safety Therefore have an authorized KIA dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 45 Driving your vehicle SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS E110100AHM EC e f stalled in snow mud or sand use E170800AHM
257. r your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced A CAUTION Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle s alu minum wheels Use only approved wheel weights a Tire replacement XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 36 p Maintenance sie y OENO76053 G200600AHM EU If the tire is worn evenly a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread This shows there is less than 1 6 mm 1 16 inch of tread left on the tire Replace the tire when this happens Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replac ing the tire XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 37 Maintenance G200601AUN Compact spare tire replacement A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mount ing a regular size tire G200700BUN EC Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels for any reason make sure
258. rd warning flasher while the vehi cle is being towed IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING F020100AUN EU If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing set the shift lever in the N Neutral position and then push the vehi cle to a safe place F020200AUN If you have a flat tire while driving If a tire goes flat while you are driving 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so brake carefully and pull off the road Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground If you are on a divided highway do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 3 P What to do in an emergency 2 When the vehicle is stopped turn on your emergency hazard flashers set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P Park automatic transaxle or reverse manual transaxle 3 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic 4 When changing a flat tire follow the instruction provided later in this sec tion F020300AUN If the engine stalls while driving 1 Reduce your speed gradually kee
259. re is a risk the parking brake may freeze apply it only temporar ily while you put the gear shift lever in P Park automatic transaxle or in first or reverse gear manual transaxle and block the rear wheels so the vehicle can not roll Then release the parking brake E120900AHM Don t let ice and snow accumu late underneath Under some conditions snow and ice can build up under the fenders and inter fere with the steering When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen you should periodically check underneath the vehicle to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components are not obstructed 12 02 PM Page 52 P E121000ASA EC Carry emergency equipment Depending on the severity of the weath er you should carry appropriate emer gency equipment Some of the items you may want to carry include tow straps or chains flashlight emergency flares sand shovel jumper cables window scraper gloves ground cloth coveralls blanket etc XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 53 P Driving your vehicle TRAILER TOWING E140000AFD If you are considering towing with your vehicle you should first check with your country s Department of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements Since laws vary the requirements for tow ing trailers cars or other types of vehi cles or apparatus may differ Ask an authorized KIA dealer for further details
260. re is dispersed Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with touch up paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of cor rosion If bare metal is showing through the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended Bird droppings Bird droppings are high ly corrosive and may damage painted Surfaces in just a few hours Always remove bird droppings as soon as possi ble Don t neglect the interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corrosion Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry Use particular care if you carry fertilizers cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 11 00 AM Page 59 Maintenance Interior care G230201BHM Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as per fumes or cosmetic oils from coming into contact with the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration lf they do come in contact with the dash board wipe off immediately If necessary use a vinyl cleaner see product instruc tions for correct usage J CAUTION Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical elec tronic components inside the vehi cle as this may dam
261. reak age 3 If the belt is adjusted properly a prob lem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system Have an authorized KIA dealer correct the problem as soon as possible D150313AHM Charging system warning light D150315AUN Tailgate open warning P light This warning light illuminates when the tailgate is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position This warning light illuminates when a door is not closed securely with the igni tion switch in any position D150316AUN Door ajar warning light D150318AHM Low fuel level warning light N This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty When it comes on you should add fuel as soon as possible Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below E can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter if equipped Low washer fluid level owt warning light if equipped a This warning light indicates the washer fluid reservoir is nearly empty Refill the washer fluid as soon as possible So am Ais XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 56 P Features of your vehicle Immobilizer indicator if equipped ee Without smart key system This indicator illuminates when the immobilizer key is inserted and turned to the ON position to start the engine At this time you can start the engine The indicator goes out after the engine is run ning
262. ressed while turning the ignition switch to the Start position The starter will not oper ate if the clutch pedal is not fully depressed Automatic Transaxle Place the transaxle shift lever in P Park Depress the brake pedal fully You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N Neutral position 3 Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts a maximum of 10 seconds then release the key In extremely cold weather below 18 C O F or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days let the engine warm up without depress ing the accelerator Whether the engine is cold or warm it should be started without depressing the accelerator 12 00 PM Page 6 P CAUTION If the engine stalls while you are in motion do not attempt to move the Shift lever to the P Park position If traffic and road conditions permit you may put the shift lever in the N Neutral position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine CAUTION Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds If the engine stalls or fails to start wait 5 to 10 seconds before re engaging the starter Improper use of the starter may damage it XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 00 PM Page 7 P Driving your vehicle OXM059005 liluminated ENGINE START STOP button Whene
263. rest E 0 bho ny eter 0 bia rerere are epe lerdal Sere 3 7 3 16 XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 7 Occupant detection system ae caan tout eve obaeuceoeseceweweneeeececuen 3 45 Odometer Tnpimeter Tip computer eener 4 47 Oil Engine essecsccoocoooscsssocesocoocsooscocoscosoosocscsococeseesocosoooooo 7 14 Outside rearview MIirrop eeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeereeceeeeeseeseeeeeee 4 42 Overheats tteeeeereereeeeeeeeceeseeseeereeceeecccceeseseeeceeceeorecceseesseeseeee 6 6 Owner maintenance E E A E A E E E EST T 5 Panoramic sunroof A a a a a a 4 30 Parking brake Ov eT eT Tr ee a 5 28 7 20 Passenger s front air bag a r T 3 51 Power brakes TT T ee ee ee ee re ee 5 27 Power outlet E E A E T E N E E E E E E E 4 97 Power steering E L A A T 4 34 Power steering fluid Tie ee ee ee E 7 19 Power window lock button E E E E E E A 4 24 Pre tensioner seat belt E E E A A r A E E E E T 3 24 Push starting a anova R T E E a A T E ew crue 6 5 Rear parking assist system E areG dare ee E dee see RG ones eet neeese 4 59 Rear seat adjustment E T ese iere i s ous A ote ae e erase sie es bre sees eens 3 1 Rearview camera Ree 4 62 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures teete 7 32 P Index Recommended lubricants and capacities 8 4 Recommended SAE viscosity numberevevevenenes 8 6 Remote keyless entry EEEE erento eee eisle e ee aes ban eloee Sess ee elewde eeu E 4 6 Road warning ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee 6 2 Rockin
264. river s door sill at the center pil lar This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle This is called the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo This label also tells you the maxi mum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center line The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry If you carry items inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they are moving as fast as the vehicle If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash the items will keep going and can Cause an injury if they strike the driv er or a passenger XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 03 PM Page 66 Driving your vehicle A CAUTION e Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warran ty Do not overload your vehicle e Using heavier suspension com ponents to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 03
265. river s side fuse panel Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating If the replacement fuse blows this indi Binh cates an electrical problem Avoid using an the system involved and immediately A Multi fuse consult an authorized KIA dealer CAUTION Three kinds of fuses are used blade type DO not use a screwdriver or any for lower amperage rating cartridge type other metal object to remove fuses i and multi fuse for higher amperage rat ecause it may cause a short circuit ay pog ings and damage the system Normal Blown OBK079042 G210000AAM A vehicle s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses Ae XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 10 59 AM Page 46 OXM079020 G210100AAM Inner panel fuse replacement 1 Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off 2 Open the fuse panel cover 3 Pull the suspected fuse straight out Use the removal tool provided on the engine compartment fuse panel cover 4 Check the removed fuse replace it if it is blown Spare fuses are provided in the engine compartment fuse panel 5 Push in a new fuse of the same rating and make sure it fits tightly in the clips If it fits loosely consult an authorized KIA dealer If you do not have a spare use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle such as the power outlet fuse If the headlights or
266. rn to the OFF posi tion when released If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement One touch lane change function if equipped To activate an one touch lane change function move the turn signal lever slightly for less than 1 5 second and then release it The lane change signals will blink 3 times NOTICE If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit OAM049046N D190700AAM EU Front fog light if equipped Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog rain or snow etc The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch 1 is turned to the on position after the headlight is turned on To turn off the fog lights turn the fog light switch 1 to the OFF position CAUTION When in operation the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 42 AM Page 67 Features of your vehicle D190900AUN EU Daytime running light Daytime Running Lights DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be help ful in many different driving conditions and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset The DRL system will m
267. rocedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGs CAUTIONs and NOTICEs A CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution Is ignored NOTICE A NOTICE indicates interesting or help ful information is being provided XM CAN ENG 1 QXP 11 26 2009 11 33 AM Page 3 Introduction FUEL REQUIREMENTS A020101AHM EU Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number R M 2 of 87 Research Octane Number 91 or higher Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL as well as minimize exhaust emis sions and spark plug fouling CAUTION Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified Consult an authorized KIA dealer for details A020103AUN EU Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol Gasohol a mixture of gasoline and ethanol also known as grain alcohol and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol also known as wood alcohol are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline Do not use gasohol containing more than 10 ethanol and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol Either of these fuels may cause drivability prob lems and damage to the fuel system Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered
268. rom the rear bumper Buzzer beeps more frequently e When an object is within 40 cm 15 in of the rear bumper Buzzer sounds continuously Non operational conditions of rear parking assist system The rear parking assist system may not operate properly when 1 Moisture is frozen to the sensor It will operate normally when the moisture has been cleared 2 The sensor is covered with foreign matter such as snow or water or the sensor cover is blocked It will operate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no longer blocked 3 Driving on uneven road surfaces unpaved roads gravel bumps gradi ent 4 Objects generating excessive noise vehicle horns loud motorcycle engines or truck air brakes are within range of the sensor 5 Heavy rain or water spray exists 6 Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are within range of the sensor 7 The sensor is covered with snow 8 Trailer towing The detecting range may decrease when 1 The sensor is stained with foreign mat ter such as snow or water The sens ing range will return to normal when removed 2 Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold The following objects may not be rec ognized by the sensor 1 Sharp or slim objects such as ropes chains or small poles 2 Objects which tend to absorb the sen sor frequency such as clothes spongy material or snow 3 Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m 40 in in hei
269. rself and his or her pas sengers Tight corner brake effect A CAUTION 4wD When turning sharply on a paved road at low speed while in four wheel drive steering control will be difficult Tight corner brake effect is a unique characteristic of four wheel drive vehicles caused by the difference in tire rotation at the four wheels and the zero degree alignment of the front wheels and sus pension Sharp turns at low speeds should be car ried out with caution So am SiS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 22 Driving your vehicle Four Wheel Drive 4WD transfer mode selection Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description e When driving in 4WD AUTO mode the vehicle operates sim ilar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating conditions However if the system determines that there is a 4WD AUTO need for the 4WD mode the engine s driving power is dis CAI SOIC E H LOCK tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter deact d eactivated ine vention Indicator light is not illuminated When driving on normal roads and pavement the vehicle moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles e This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades off road driving driving on sandy and muddy roads etc to an maximize traction AWD LOCK uy e This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds LOCK above 30 km h 19 mph and is shi
270. rucks going by and rough roads are a few rea sons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow e Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle as well as dirt and water e The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to them Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper KIA trailer hitch accessory is available at an authorized KIA dealer E140200AUN Safety chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the man ufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your trailer And never allow safety chains to drag on the ground E140300AUN Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system make sure it conforms to your country s regulations and that it is prop erly installed and operating correctly If your trailer weight exceeds
271. s all season tires on some models to provide good per formance for use all year round including snowy and icy road condi tions All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M S Mud and Snow on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires KIA specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior perform ance on dry roads Summer tire per formance is substantially reduced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M S Mud and Snow on the tire side wall if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions KIA recom mends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels Snow tires If you equip your car with snow tires they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the Original tires Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels other wise poor handling may result Snow tires should carry 28 kPa 4 psi more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver s side of the center pillar or up to the maxi mum pressure shown on the tire sidewall whichever is less Do not drive faster than 120 km h 75 mph when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires Radial ply tires Radial ply tires provide improved tread life road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride The radi al ply tires u
272. s are not in good condition making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident Be sure your tires are in good shape e Turn on your headlights to make it eas ier for others to see you Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes If you must go through puddles try to drive through them slowly e If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet apply them lightly while driving until normal braking oper ation returns E110600AUN Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no high er than the bottom of the wheel hub Drive through any water slowly Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected After driving through water dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 49 Driving your vehicle E110700AHM Highway driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire fail ure x NOTICE Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires Fuel engine coolant and engine oil High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring Do not forget to check both the engine coolant an
273. s done through the channels within Current category 3 Preset Selection Button e Press 1 6 buttons less than 0 8 sec onds to play the channel saved in each button Press 1 6 button for 0 8 seconds or longer to save current channel to the respective button with a beep 4 SCAN Selection Button e When the SCAN button is pressed it automatically scans the radio stations upwards The SCAN feature steps through every channel starting from the initial chan nel for ten seconds Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel If CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen channel chang ing is done through the channels with in current category 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button e Rotate clockwise to increase the chan nel number or to scroll down the cate gory list e Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the channel number or to scroll up the category list e Press this to make selection of chan nels or items ee XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page ab Features of your vehicle 6 CAT FOLDER Button e Press V CAT A button to enter the Troubleshooting 1 Antenna Error ee 7 Category List Mode The display will indicate the category items highlight the category that the current channel belongs to In the Category List Mode press these buttons to navigate category list Press ENTER Button to se
274. s engine damage may result The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure In normal operation it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on then go out when the engine is started If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running there is a serious malfunc tion If this happens stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so turn off the engine and check the oil level If the oil level is low fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again If the light stays on with the engine running turn the engine off immediately In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running the engine should be checked by an authorized KIA dealer before the vehicle is driven again D150308AHM EE Parking brake amp brake O fluid warning light BRAKE Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position The warning light should go off after a few seconds when the parking brake is released Low brake fluid level warning If the warning light remains on it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low If the warning light remains on 1 Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle 2 With the engine stopped check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required Then check all brake components fo
275. s on and stays on the speedometer or odometer tripmeter may not work In this case have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 53 P Features of your vehicle D150304AHM EU U1 Seat belt warning fh As a reminder to the driver the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned on the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approxi mately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will blink until the 6 seconds are up The warning chime will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km h 6 mph the seat belt warning light and chime will operate approximately 11 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle speed decreases below 5 km h 3 mph D150305AHM Turn signal indicator lt The blinking green arrows on the instru ment panel show the
276. s opened the doors will not lock even though the front portion 1 of the central door lock switch is pressed OXM049009 D050202AAM EU With central door lock switch Operate by pressing the central door lock switch e When pressing the front portion 1 of the switch all vehicle doors will lock e When pressing the rear portion 2 of the switch all vehicle doors will unlock So am Sisal XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 38 AM Page 18 P Impact sensing door unlock system if equipped In the event of air bag deployment result ing from a vehicle impact all doors will automatically unlock Auto door lock unlock feature automatic transaxle if equipped e All doors will automatically lock when the transaxle shift lever is shifted out of P Park e All doors will automatically unlock when the transaxle shift lever is shifted into P Park Speed sensing door lock system manual transaxle if equipped e All doors will be automatically locked after the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km 12 mph e All doors will automatically unlock when the engine is shut off and the ignition key is removed x NOTICE An authorized KIA dealer can activate or deactivate some auto door lock unlock features If you want to activate or deactivate some door lock unlock feature consult an authorized KIA dealer OXM049010 DO50500AAM Child protector rear door lock
277. s the head rest down Then make sure the headrest is locked in place 4 I I I I I I I I I I I XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 40 AM Page 18 Safety features of your vehicle SEAT BELTS C020100AHM Seat belt restraint system 1 OXM039019N Armrest 2nd row seat gt To use the armrest pull it forward from the seatback XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 40 AM Page 19 Safety features of your vehicle 1GQA2083 C020101AAM EU Seat belt warning ae As a reminder to the driver the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening So am iS XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 40 AM Page 20 P Safety features of your vehicle If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned on the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approxi mately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will blink until the 6 seconds are up The warning chime will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the seat belt warning light and chime will operate for approximately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light and chime will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is not fastened
278. s to play from the beginning of the current song Press the button for less than 0 8 sec onds and press it again within 1 sec ond to move to and play the previous song Press the button for 0 8 seconds or longer to play the song in reverse direction in fast speed Press the TRACK A button for less than 0 8 seconds to move to the next song Press the button for 0 8 seconds or longer to play the song in forward direction in fast speed 3 RANDOM Playback Button e Press this button for less than 0 8 sec onds to play songs randomly in current folder e Press this button for 0 8 seconds or longer to play songs randomly in entire USB device e To cancel RANDOM play press this button again 4 REPEAT Button e Press this button for less than 0 8 sec onds to repeat current song Press this button for 0 8 seconds or longer to repeat all songs in current folder To cancel REPEAT press this button again 5 SCAN Selection Button Plays each song in the USB device for 10 seconds To cancel SCAN Play press this button again 6 INFO Button Displays the information of the file cur rently played in the order of FILE NAME TITLE ARTIST ALBUM FOLDER TOTAL FILE NORMAL DISPLAY FILE NAME Displays no informa tion if the file has no song information 7 SEARCH Knob amp ENTER Button e Turn this knob clockwise to browse songs after current song or counter clockwise to browse songs bef
279. se the lap The infant or child could be seri chance of serious injury in a crash ously injured or killed in the event of a e Passengers should not place hard crash All infants and children should or sharp objects between them be properly restrained in appropriate selves and the air bags Carrying child safety seats or seat belts in the hard or sharp objects on your lap or in rear seat your mouth can result in injuries if an air bag inflates 3 64 XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 43 AM Page 65 Safety features of your vehicle C041400AUN Adding equipment to or modify ing your air bag equipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle s frame bumper system front end or side sheet metal or ride height this may affect the operation of your vehicle s air bag system OXM039050N C041200AXM EG Air bag warning label Air bag warning labels some required by the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards CMVSS are attached to the sunvisor alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 1 Keys 4 2 Remote keyless entry 4 6 Smart key 4 9 Theft alarm system 4 13 Door locks 4 15 Tailgate 4 19 Windows 4 21 Hood 4 25 Fuel filler lid 4 27 Features of your vehicle Panoramic Sunroof 4 30 Steering wheel 4 34 Mirrors 4 36 Instrument cluster 4 44 Rear parking assist
280. seat belts on and their feet on the down back seat All occupants should floor If occupants are too close to the sit upright fully back in their seats with air bag covers they could be injured if their seat belts on and their feet on the the air bags inflate floor Do not attach or place objects on or e Passengers should not move out of near the air bag covers Any object or change seats while the vehicle is attached to or placed on the front or moving A passenger who is not wear side air bag covers could interfere with ing a seat belt during a crash or emer the proper operation of the air bags gency stop can be thrown against the Do not modify the front seats inside of the vehicle against other Modification of the front seats could occupants or out of the vehicle interfere with the operation of the sup e Each seat belt is designed to plemental restraint system sensing restrain one occupant If more than components or side air bags one person uses the same seat belt Do not place items under the front they could be seriously injured or killed seats Placing items under the front in a collision seats could interfere with the operation e Do not use any accessories on seat of the supplemental restraint system belts Devices claiming to improve sensing components and wiring har occupant comfort or reposition the seat NESSES belt can reduce the protection provided Never hold an infant or child on your by the seat belt and increa
281. second The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked However after pressing this button the tailgate will lock automatically unless you open the tailgate within 30 seconds Also once the tailgate is opened and then closed the tailgate will lock auto matically D020105AHM Alarm 4 The horn sounds and the hazard warning lights blink for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for more than 0 5 sec onds To stop the horn and lights press any button on the transmitter D040100AHM Smart key functions Carrying the smart key you may lock and unlock the vehicle doors and tailgate Also you may start the engine Refer to the following for more details So am Seis XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 10 P Features of your vehicle D040101BHM Locking Pressing the button of the front outside door handles with all doors and tailgate closed and any door unlocked locks all the doors and tailgate The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds once to indicate that all doors and tailgate are locked The button will only operate when the smart key is with in 0 7 1 m 28 40 in from the outside door handle If you want to make sure that a door has locked or not you should check the door lock button inside the vehicle or pull the outside door handle Even though you press the button the doors will not lock and the chime
282. sed on this vehicle are of belted construction and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle Radial ply tires have the same load carrying capacity as bias ply or bias belted tires of the same size and use the same recommended inflation pressure Mixing of radial ply tires with bias ply or bias belted tires is not recommended Any combina tions of radial ply and bias ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling The best rule to fol low is Identical radial ply tires should always be used as a Set of four Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires Cuts and punctures in radial ply tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your tire dealer for radial ply tire repairs XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 59 AM Page 45 Maintenance FUSES Blade type This vehicle has 2 fuse panels one locat ed in the driver s side panel bolster the other in the engine compartment near If any of your vehicle s lights acces sories or controls do not work check the Netra Blown appropriate circuit fuse If a fuse has blown the element inside the fuse will melt Cartridge type If the electrical system does not work first check the d
283. severely injured when the air bag inflates Always follow the precautions about seat belts air bags and occupant safety con tained in this manual To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries and receive the maxi mum safety benefit from your restraint system Continued ABC Always Buckle Children in the back seat It is the safest place for children of any age to ride Front and side air bags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats Move your seat as far back as practical from the front air bags while still maintaining control of the vehicle You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags Improperly positioned drivers and passen gers can be severely injured by inflating air bags Never lean against the door or center console always sit in an upright position Do not allow a passenger to ride in the front seat when the PAS SENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor is illuminated because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a moderate or severe frontal crash Continued XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 54 Safety features of your vehicle Rear impact Te re a y OEPO36096N Side impact p XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 55 Safety features of your vehicle ro rr 36 6h a i oI 4 a a i oy dtriTTiLe a OCM030306 CO4
284. side vehicle identification number VIN its ownership etc The number is punched on the floor under the front passenger seat To check the number open the carpet flap OCM056002 So am SiS H030000APB p The tires supplied on your new vehicle XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 8 Specifications amp Consumer information TIRE SPECIFICATION AND ENGINE NUMBER PRESSURE LABEL OXM079101L are chosen to provide the best perform ance for normal driving The tire label located on the driver s side center pillar gives the tire pressures rec ommended for your vehicle OXM089006L H04000AUN The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 1 XM CAN ENG INDEX QXP 12 4 2009 11 14 AM Page 2 Index A o O Air bags seseeseocooooooosooscecocooososooccosscosecsooosososesocossessssosoosseooo 3 39 Air bag warning F210 gt eee 3 65 Air bag warning light E E 3 42 Curtain air bag POrerrereerererererer a AEE E 3 57 Driver s and passenger s front air bag 3 51 Occupant detection system braidieteialaiern Gibveieie eeisa beemloe TEN 3 45 Side impact air bag cence ences ec escececeseseseeeeeeenseenceseseseseseese 3 55 Air cleaner Pree ere rere reer ere ree ee eer eee e reer eee ere rere e rere ere eee ee eee ee 7 21 Alarm system sesesecoecoooooooocsocecoceocososososccececcecossssossscseeos
285. sly the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate Pull your car over to a safe place and stop the engine Restart the engine If the ABS warning light goes off then your ABS system is normal Otherwise you may have a prob lem with the ABS Contact an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible NOTICE When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time This happens because of low bat tery voltage It does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned e Do not pump your brakes e Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle 12 02 PM Page 32 P OXM059017 E070500AHM EU Electronic stability control ESC The Electronic Stability control ESC system is designed to stabilize the vehi cle during cornering maneuvers ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and intervenes with the engine manage ment system to stabilize the vehicle XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle The Electronic Stability Control ESC system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions It is not a substitute for safe driving practices Factors including speed road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effe
286. sorb the load Reapply the brakes reapply the park ing brake and shift the vehicle to R Reverse for manual transaxle or P Park for automatic transaxle Shut off the vehicle and release the vehicle brakes but leave the parking brake set Sa am Seis XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 58 P Driving your vehicle When you are ready to leave after park ing on a hill 1 With the manual transaxle in Neutral or automatic transaxle in P Park apply your brakes and hold the brake pedal down while you e Start your engine e Shift into gear and e Release the parking brake 2 Slowly remove your foot from the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks E140500AUN Maintenance when trailer towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you regularly pull a trailer Important items to pay particular atten tion to include engine oil automatic transaxle fluid axle lubricant and cooling system fluid Brake condition is another important item to frequently check Each item is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering its a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Don t forget to also maintain your trailer and hitch Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and check it periodically Preferably con duct
287. sories which are less than 10A in elec tric capacity Adjust the air conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet Close the cover when not in use Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle s power outlet These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle Zo OXM049186 Clock Hour 1 Pressing the H button will advance the time displayed by one hour Minute 2 Pressing the M button will advance the time displayed by one minute To change the 24 hour format to the 12 hours format if equipped while press ing the H button press the M button for 3 seconds or more For example if the H and M buttons are pressed for more than 3 seconds while the time is 22 15 the display will change to 10 15 XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 49 AM Page 99 Features of your vehicle Floor mat anchor s if equipped P When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor s in your vehicle This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward OXM049217 D281000AHM Luggage net holder if equipped To keep items from shifting in the cargo area you can use the holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net If necessary contact your authorized KIA dealer to obtain a l
288. sounds for 3 seconds if any of the following Occurs e The smart key is in the vehicle e The ENGINE START STOP button is in the ACC or ON position e Any door except the tailgate is opened D040102AEN EU Unlocking Pressing the button of the drivers out side door handle with all doors and tail gate closed and locked unlocks the dri vers door The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds twice to indi cate that the driver s door is unlocked All doors and tailgate are unlocked if the button is pressed once more within 4 seconds The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that all the doors and tailgate are unlocked Pressing the button of the front passen ger s outside door handle with all doors and tailgate closed and locked unlocks all the doors and tailgate The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds twice to indicate that all doors and tailgate are unlocked The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0 7 1 m 28 40 in from the outside door handle When the smart key is recognized in the area of 0 7 1 m 28 40 in from the front outside door handle other people can also open the door without possession of the smart key D040103AHM Tailgate unlocking If you are within 0 7 1 m 28 40 in from the outside tailgate handle with your smart key in possession the tailgate will unlock and open when you press the tail gate hand
289. ss vehicle weight This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers E160700AUN EU GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the cer tification label located on the drivers door sill XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 1 Road warning 6 2 In case of an emergency while driving 6 2 If the engine will not start 6 3 Emergency starting 6 4 If the engine overheats 6 6 If you have a flat tire 6 7 Towing 6 16 What to do in an emergency XM CAN ENG 6 lt OXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 2 P What to do in an emergency ROAD WARNING F010100ASA Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching overtaking or passing your vehicle It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehi cle is stopped near the edge of a road way Depress the flasher switch with the igni tion switch in any position The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously e The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not e The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on e Care must be taken when using the haza
290. stance CAUTION Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 7 What to do in an emergency IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE OXM069001 F070100AEN an Jack and tools The jack jack handle wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment 1 Jack handle 2 Jack 3 Wheel lug nut wrench FO70101AAM Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only To prevent the jack from rattling while the vehicle is in motion store it properly Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 05 PM Page 8 What to do in an emergency OXM069002 Se OX M09003 Removing and storing the spare 3 Use the wheel lug nut wrench to tire loosen the bolt enough to lower Your spare tire is stored underneath the spare tire your vehicle directly below the cargo Turn the wrench counterclockwise area until the spare tire reaches the To remove the spare tire ground 1 Open the tailgate 2 Find the plastic hex bolt cover and remove the cover with a flat head object or coin XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 06 PM Page 9 What to do in an emergenc OXM069004
291. sult in loss of control an accident or vehicle rollover Be sure to read the Reducing the risk of a rollover driving guide lines in section 5 of this manual VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCESS A030000AUN No special break in period is needed By following a few simple precautions for the first 1 000 km 600 miles you may add to the performance economy and life of your vehicle e Do not race the engine While driving keep your engine speed rom or revolutions per minute between 2 000 rpm and 4 000 rpm Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time either fast or slow Varying engine speed is needed to properly break in the engine Avoid hard stops except in emergen cies to allow the brakes to seat prop erly Don t let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time Don t tow a trailer during the first 2 000 km 1 200 miles of operation XM CAN ENG 1 QXP 11 26 2009 Introduction 11 33 AM Page 6 P INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER A050000AX EC Door Ajar Warning Light Tailgate Open Warning Light KA Seat Belt Warning Light High Beam Indicator Turn Signal Indicator Front Fog Light Indicator ESC Indicator ESC OFF Indicator ABS Warning Light oyY Parking Brake amp Brake Fluid zaxa Warning Light e Malfunction Indicator I Air Bag Warning Light Immobilizer Indicator Low Fuel Level Warning Light Sea Shi
292. system 4 59 Rearview camera 4 62 Hazard warning flasher 4 62 Lighting 4 63 Wipers and washers 4 68 Interior lights 4 71 Defroster 4 73 Manual climate control system 4 74 Automatic climate control system 4 83 Windshield defrosting and defogging 4 91 Storage compartments 4 94 Interior features 4 96 Exterior feature 4 101 Audio system 4 102 XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 2 Features of your vehicle KEYS D010100AUN Type A Record your key number The key code number is il stamped on the tag i attached to the key set Should you lose your keys this number will enable an authorized KIA dealer to dupli cate the keys easily Remove the tag and store it in a safe place Also record the code number and keep it in a safe place OFD047002 A not in the vehicle OXM049200 D010200AAM Key operations e Used to start the engine e Used to lock and unlock the doors e Used to lock and unlock the glove box if equipped ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 3 Features of your vehicle OFD047001 B D010300AXM EC Immobilizer system if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle With the immobilizer system
293. t system make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts and fits your child Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 32 Safety features of your vehicle XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 33 Safety features of your vehicle Rearward facing child restraint system For safety reasons we recommend that A lt a A the child restraint system be used in the rear seats Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency condi tions emergency lock mode you must manually change these seat belts to the auto lock mode to secure a child restraint a a OUN026150 C030100AHM EU Using a child restraint system For small children and babies the use of a child seat or infant seat is required The child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the man ufacturer s instructions XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 Safety features of your vehicle 11 41 AM Page 34 E2MS103005 C030102AAM EU Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock mode The auto lock mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehi cle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint sys tem To secure a chil
294. t will be required because the power steering system will be disabled If you are driving down a long hill the brakes may overheat and brake per formance will be reduced Stop often and let the brakes cool off What to do in an emergenc N CAUTION Automatic transaxle e If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground it can be towed only from the front Be sure that the transaxle is in neu tral Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position A driver must be in the towed vehi cle to operate the steering and brakes e To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle limit the vehicle speed to 15 km h 10 mph and drive less than 1 5 km 1 mile when towing e Before towing check the auto matic transaxle fluid leak under your vehicle If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 55 AM Page 1 Engine compartment 7 2 Maintenance services 7 4 Owner maintenance 7 5 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7 11 Engine oil 7 14 Engine coolant 7 15 Brake clutch fluid 7 18 Power steering fluid 7 19 Washer fluid 7 20 Parking brake 7 20 Air cleaner 7 21 Climate control air filter 7 23 Wiper blades 7 25 Battery 7 29 5 Tires and wheels 7 32 Fuses 7 45 Maintenance Appearance care 7 54 Emission control system 7
295. t would not provide additional occupant protection However if equipped with side impact and curtain air bags the air bags may inflate in a rollover when it is detected by the rollover sensor Eg mir I nes ie e Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle U Ja 1VQA2092 collides with objects such as utility poles or trees where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not deliv ered to the sensors an rails must be performed by an authorized XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 43 AM Page 63 Safety features of your vehicle C041100AUN SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance free and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate or con tinuously remains on have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized KIA dealer Any work on the SRS system such as removing installing repairing or any work on the steering wheel the front passenger s panel front seats and roof KIA dealer Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 43 AM Page 64 Safety features of your vehicle C041300AUN e Keep occupants away from the air Additional safety precautions bag covers All occupants should sit e Never let passengers ride in the upright fully back in their seats with cargo area or on top of a folded their
296. taining MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether over 15 0 vol Oxygen Content 2 7 weight A020105AUN Do not use methanol Fuels containing methanol wood alco hol should not be used in your vehicle This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per formance and damage components of the fuel system A020106AUN Gasolines for cleaner air To help contribute to cleaner air KIA rec ommends that you use gasolines treated with detergent additives which help pre vent deposit formation in the engine These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System A020107AUN Operation in foreign countries If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country be sure to e Observe all regulations regarding reg istration and insurance e Determine that acceptable fuel is avail able ENG 1 QXP 11 26 2009 11 33 AM Page 5 Introduction VEHICLE HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS A090000AEN As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control an accident or vehicle rollover Specific design characteristics higher ground clearance track etc give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles In other words they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Again failure to oper ate this vehicle correctly may re
297. ted metal exposed to corrosion High corrosion areas If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materi als corrosion protection is particularly important Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts dust control chemicals ocean air and industrial pollution Moisture breeds corrosion Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur For example corrosion is accelerated by high humidity particularly when tempera tures are just above freezing In such conditions the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle s surface by moisture that evaporate slowly Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in con tact with the vehicle Although the mud appears to be dry it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dis persed For all these reasons it is partic ularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle So am Seis XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 Maintenance 11 00 AM Page 58 To help prevent corrosion You can help prevent corrosion from get ting started by observing the following Keep your vehicle clean Th
298. teering system and cause damage to it Use only the specified power steering fluid Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8 G090200AEN Checking the power steering hose Check the connections for oil leaks dam age and twists in the power steering hose before driving XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 57 AM Page 20 Maintenance WASHER FLUID _ OXM079010 G120100AUN C1 Checking the washer fluid level Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available However use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli mates to prevent freezing PARKING BRAKE i OXM059013 Checking the parking brake Type A Check whether the stroke is within spec ification when the parking brake pedal is depressed with 20 kg 44 Ib 196N of force Also the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fair ly steep grade If the stroke is more or less than specified have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized KIA dealer Stroke 4 5 notch XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 57 AM Page 21 Maintenance E OXM059015 OXMO079012 ll _ WE OxIM079013 Type B G160100AAM EC 1 Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching gt Check the stroke of the parking brake by Filter replacement clips and open the cover counting the number of clicks heard It must
299. that you close the tail gate before driving your vehicle Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving Features of your vehicle DO70200AAM Closing the tailgate To close the tailgate lower and push down the tailgate firmly Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 38 AM Page 20 Features of your vehicle n PE Ea A 2 qm i i ies P A n z E 4 o oh oat 2 m 7 OXM049013N DO70300AHM an Emergency tailgate safety release Your vehicle is equipped with an emer gency tailgate safety release lever locat ed on the bottom of the tailgate When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area the tailgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing open the tailgate XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 38 AM Page 21 Features of your vehicle WINDOWS DO80000AUN 1 Drivers door power window switch 2 Front passengers door power win dow switch 3 Rear door left power window switch 4 Rear door right power window switch 5 Window opening and closing 6 Automatic power window up down Driver s window 7 Power window lock switch if equipped NOTICE In cold and wet climates power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions OXM049014N XM CAN ENG
300. the on condition and thus allow the passenger airbag to deploy needlessly in a colli sion increasing your repair costs XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 51 Safety features of your vehicle Driver s front air bag The indication of the system s presence are the letters AIR BAG embossed on the air bag pad cover on the steering wheel and the passenger s side front panel pad above the glove box The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger s side front panel above the glove box The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle s driver and or the front passen ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity The SRS uses sensors to gath er information about the driver s and front passenger s seat belt usage and impact severity OXM039038 C040400AAM EU Driver s and passenger s front air bag Your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Restraint Air Bag System and lap shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating position So am SiS XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 52 P Safety features of your vehicle The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger s seat belts are fastened These sensors provide the ability to con trol the SRS deployment base
301. the maxi mum allowed weight without trailer brakes then the trailer will also require its own brakes as well Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly e Don t tap into or modify your vehicle s brake system XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 02 PM Page 55 P Driving your vehicle E140400AUN Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you must get to know your trailer Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform safety chains electrical connector s lights tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer mov ing and then apply the trailer brake con troller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electri cal connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still work ing E140401AUN Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi cle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can
302. the mirror to activate your garage door s estate gate home lighting etc The mirror actually learns the codes from your various exist ing transmitters XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 38 Features of your vehicle Retain the original transmitter for future Flashing programming procedures i e new vehi cle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the pro grammed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes follow step 1 in the Programming portion of this text Programming Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and or operation of HomeLink It is also recommended that a OHD046306N new battery be replaced in the hand held 1 When programming the buttons for the transmitter of the device being pro first time press and hold the left and grammed to HomeLink for quicker train center buttons A R simultane C 7 ing and accurate transmission of the ously until the indicator light begins to radio frequency flash after approximately 20 seconds Follow these steps to train your This procedure erases the factory set HomeLink mirror default codes Do not perform this step when programming the additional HomeLink buttons XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 39 P Features of your vehicle x NOTICE For non rolling code garage door open ers follow steps 2 3
303. the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter rim width and offset G200800AHM Tire traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear Slow down whenever there is rain snow or ice on the road to reduce the possibility of losing con trol of the vehicle G200900AUN Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear If you find a tire is worn unevenly have your dealer check the wheel alignment When you have new tires installed make sure they are balanced This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life Additionally a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 38 Maintenance 1 I030B04JM G201000AUN Tire sidewall labeling This information identifies and describes the fundamental charac teristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall G201001AUN 1 Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or Brand name is shown G201002AHM 2 Tire size designation A tire s sidewall is marked with a tire size designation You will need this information when selecting replace ment tires for y
304. the switch for lower speed To turn the fan speed control off press the front blower OFF button OXM049161 Air conditioning Press the A C button to turn the air con ditioning system on indicator light will illuminate Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 47 AM Page 90 Features of your vehicle 2 To turn off the 3rd row air conditioning control system press the 3rd row air conditioning ON OFF button A C once more located on the front climate con trol panel or set the fan speed to the OFF position with the 3rd row fan speed switch indicator light on the ON OFF button A C is not illuminat ed OxM049162 E i OXM049211 OFF mode 3rd row air conditioning man Press the front blower OFF button to turn if equipped off the front air climate control system To turn on the 3rd row air conditioning However you can still operate the mode control system and air intake buttons as long as the igni 1 Press the 3rd row air conditioning tion switch isin the ON position ON OFF button located on the front climate control panel and set the fan speed to the desired speed with the 3rd row fan speed switch located in the rear of the vehicle indicator light on the ON OFF button A C will illuminate as long as the fan speed is not in the OFF position XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 47 AM Page 91 Feat
305. the vehicle has been parked in direct x NOTICE e When using the air conditioning sys e When using the air conditioning sys tem you may notice clear water drip tem monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside tempera tures are high Air conditioning sys tem operation may cause engine over heating Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning sys tem off if the temperature gauge indi cates engine overheating When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed sunlight during hot weather open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days decrease the humidity inside the vehi cle by operating the air conditioning system During air conditioning system opera tion you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles This is a normal system operation characteristic Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance ping or even puddling on the ground under the passenger side of the vehi cle This is a normal system operation characteristic Operating th
306. thorized KIA dealer partment fuse panel 4 Push in a new fuse of the same rating and make sure it fits tightly in the clips If it fits loosely consult an authorized KIA dealer A CAUTION After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment securely install the fuse panel cover If not G210201AAM ap electrical failures may occur from Multi fuse water contact If the multi fuse is blown it must be removed as follows 1 Turn off the engine 2 Disconnect the negative battery cable 3 Remove the fuse panel on the right side in the engine compartment 4 Remove the nuts shown in the picture above 5 Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating 6 Reinstall in the reverse order of removal XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 59 AM Page 49 Maintenance G210300AAM EU Fuse relay panel description Inside the fuse relay panel covers you can find the fuse relay label describing fuse relay name and capacity Inner fuse panel Engine compartment fuse panel NOTICE Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehi cle It is accurate at the time of printing When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle refer to the fuse panel label OXM079026 OXM079027 XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 59 AM Page 50 p Maintenance Inner fuse panel Description Fuse rating Protected componeni Instrument Cluster IND MICOM Tire Pressure Mon
307. ti lation system temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irrita tion has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable Air for the heating cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves snow ice or other obstructions To prevent interior fog on the wind shield set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position turn on the air condi tioning system and adjust the temper ature control to desired temperature Air conditioning All KIA Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R 134a refrigerant which does not dam age the ozone layer 1 Start the engine Press the air condi tioning button 2 Set the mode to the 8 position 3 Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position 4 Adjust the fan speed control and tem perature control to maintain maximum comfort e When maximum cooling is desired set the temperature control to the extreme left position set the mode control to the MAX A C position then set the fan speed control to the highest speed oO XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 45 AM Page 81 P Features of your vehicle Air conditioning system operation tips e If
308. ting distance limit about 10 m 30 feet e The battery in the transmitter is weak e Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal The weather is extremely cold The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter When the transmitter does not work properly open and close the door with the ignition key If you have a problem with the transmitter contact an author ized KIA dealer CAUTION Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids it will not be covered by your manufactur er s vehicle warranty This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance it will not be covered by your manufactur er s vehicle warranty OAM049002 D020300AHM Battery replacement A transmitter uses
309. tor gt will blink 5 times and go off indicating the beginning of the limp home proce dure 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position 3 To enter the first digit in this example 2 turn the ignition switch to the ON and ACC position twice Perform the same procedure for the next digits between 3 seconds and 10 seconds for example for 3 turn the ignition ON and ACC 3 times 4 If all of the digits have been input suc cessfully you have to start the engine within 30 seconds If you attempt to start the engine after 30 seconds the engine will not start and you will have to input your password again After performing the limp home proce dure you have to see an authorized KIA dealer immediately to inspect and repair your ignition key or immobilizer system So am Seis XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 37 AM Page 6 P REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED OAM049001A Remote keyless entry system operations D020101AAM EU Lock 1 All doors and tailgate are locked if the lock button is pressed If all doors and tailgate are closed the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that all doors and tailgate are locked If the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds the horn will beep once with the hazard warning lights blinking once However if any door or tailgate remains open the hazard warning lights w
310. tructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform As explained earlier in this section sev eral procedures can be done only by an authorized KIA dealer with special tools x NOTICE Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warran ty coverage For details read the sepa rate Warranty amp Consumer Information manual provided with the vehicle If you re unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure have it done by an authorized KIA dealer 10 56 AM Page 5 P OWNER MAINTENANCE G030000AUN The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized KIA dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe dependable operation of your vehi cle Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor parts and lubricants used Maintenance Owner maintenance schedule G030101AHM When you stop for fuel e Check the engine oil level e Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir e Check the windshield washer fluid level Look for low or under inflated tires So am Seis XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 56 AM Page 6 p Maintenance G030102AAM G030103AHM G030105AHM C1 While operating your vehicle At least monthly At least onc
311. tton on the steering wheel e To Finish a Call Press button on the steering wheel x NOTICE In the following situations you or the other party may have difficulty hearing each other 1 Speaking at the same time your voice may not reach each other parties This is not a malfunction Speak alternate ly with the other party on the phone 2 Keep the Bluetooth R volume to a low level High level volume may result in distortion and echo When driving on a rough road When driving at high speeds When the window is open When the air conditioning vents are facing the microphone When the sound of the air condition ing fan is loud NN Un amp eo N Features of your vehicle m Using the head unit as Bluetooth music The head unit supports A2DP Audio Advanced Distribution Profile and AVRCP Audio Video Remote Control Profile Both profiles are available for listening to the MP3 music via Bluetooth cellular phone supporting above Bluetooth pro files To play MP3 music from the Bluetooth cellular phone press the AUX button until MP3 Play is displayed on the LCD Then try playing music by phone When playing music from the Bluetooth cellular phone the head unit displays MP3 MODE XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page at NOTE e Not only MP3 files all the sounds that the phone supports can be heard by the audio system e The Bluetooth cellular phon
312. two or more vehicles of the same model i e both vehicles are KIA SORENTO some phones may not handle Bluetooth devices of that name correctly In this case you may need to change the name displayed on your phone from Sorento to Sorento1 and Sorento2 Refer to your phone s User s Guide or contact your cellular carrier or phone manufacturer for instructions e Connecting phone When the Bluetooth system is enabled the phone previously used is automati cally selected and re connected If you want to select different phone previously paired the phone can be selected through Select Phone menu Only a selected phone can be used with the hands free system at a time 1 Press button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Select Phone after prompt The system lists all the registered phone names 4 Say the name or number of desired phone from the list 5 Say Yes to confirm 6 By manual operation Select SELECT in PHONE menu then select desired phone from the list e Deleting Phone The paired phone can be deleted When the phone is deleted all the infor mation associated with that phone is also deleted including phonebook If you want to use the deleted phone with the audio system again pairing procedure must be completed once more 1 Press button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Delete Phone after prompt The system lists all the registered phone names 4 Say the name or number of des
313. u try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice the glass or the motor could be dam aged Do not leave the roller blind closed while the sunroof is opened Tilting the sunroof b Before opening or closing the sunroof open the roller blind refer to the following page for instructions on how to use the roller blind To open the sunroof push the sunroof control lever upward To close the sunroof pull the sunroof lever downward or forward until the sun roof moves to the desired position XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 33 Features of your vehicle Resetting the sunroof Whenever the vehicle battery is discon nected or discharged you must reset your sunroof system as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Open the roller blind Close the sunroof Release the sunroof control lever Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close about 10 sec 0O AOUN SAMOSS0SUN onds until the sunroof is moved a lit Roller blind tle Then release the lever b The roller blinds are installed inside of 6 Push the sunroof control lever forward the sunroof and glass roof in the direction of close until the sun Open or close the roller blind manually roof operates as follows using the handle 1 when you need to Before opening or closing the sunroof TILT OPEN SLI
314. ual speeds are selected automatically depending on the position of the shift lever x NOTICE The first few shifts on a new vehicle if the battery has been disconnected may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM Transaxle Control Module or PCM Powertrain Control Module eS am na iS XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 16 Driving your vehicle For smooth operation depress the brake E060101AAM pedal when shifting from N Neutral to a CAUTION Transaxle ranges forward or reverse gear e TO avoid damage to your The indicator in the instrument cluster transaxle do not accelerate the displays the shift lever position when the engine in R Reverse or any for ignition switch is in the ON position ward gear position with the brakes on P Park e When stopped on an incline do not hold the vehicle with the engine power Use the service brake or the parking brake Do not shift from N Neutral or P Park into D Drive or R Reverse when the engine is above idle speed Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P Park This position locks the transaxle and prevents the drive wheels from rotating XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle CAUTION The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P Park while the vehicle is in motion R Reverse Use
315. uggage net XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 49 AM Page 100 Features of your vehicle J CAUTION To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compart ment b Roof rack if equipped XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 49 AM Page 101 Features of your vehicle EXTERIOR FEATURES CAUTION e When carrying cargo on the roof rack take the necessary precau tions to make sure the cargo does not damage the roof of the vehicle When carrying large objects on the roof rack make sure they do not exceed the overall roof length or width When you are carrying cargo on the roof rack do not operate the sunroof if equipped D290100AAM If the vehicle has a roof rack you can load cargo on top of your vehicle x NOTICE If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof be sure not to position cargo onto the roof rack in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 52 AM Page ah Features of your vehicle AUDIO SYSTEM x NOTICE If you install an after market HID head lamp your vehicle s audio and electron ic device may malfunction OXM049252N Antenna D300102AAM EU Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to receive AM or and FM broadcast signals This antenna is removable To remove the roof antenna turn it counterclock wise
316. ur vehicle MP3 CD File Name Title Artist Album Folder Total Files Not dis played if the information is unavailable on the CD or file 10 FOLDER Moving Button e Press FOLDER V button to move to child folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder Press TUNE ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed It will play the first song in the folder Press FOLDER button to move to parent folder of the current folder and aE display the first song in the folder Press TUNE ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed 11 SEARCH Knob amp ENTER Button e Turn this knob clockwise to browse songs after current song or counter clockwise to browse songs before cur rent song To play the displayed song press the knob Pressing this knob without turning enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode NOTE Order of playing files folders Folder AA RE Folder D Song File DO O DO Folder ABA Folder AB T O C Folder ABB Folder B Folder BA a OO Folder BB 1 Song playing order to sequentially 2 Folder playing order Root Folder gt Folder AA Folder ABA gt Folder ABB gt Folder BA gt Folder BB If no song file is contained in the folder that folder is not displayed XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page mah Features of your vehicle AUX US
317. ures of your vehicle WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING e For maximum defrosting set the tem perature control to the extreme right hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed lf warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging set the mode to the floor defrost position Before driving clear all snow and ice from the windshield rear window out side rear view mirrors and all side win dows Clear all snow and ice from the hood OXM049165 and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to Manual climate control system reduce the probability of fogging up the aj P inside of the windshield TO CANA alee MASAE g 1 Set the fan speed to the desired posi tion 2 Select desired temperature 3 Select the or GY position 4 The outside fresh air and air condi tioning will be selected automatically If the air conditioning and or outside fresh air position are not selected auto matically press the corresponding button manually So am Sisal XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 48 AM Page 92 Features of your vehicle OXM049166 To defrost outside windshield 1 Set the fan speed to the highest posi tion 2 Set the temperature to the extreme hot position 3 Select the WY position 4 The outside fresh air and air condi tioning will be selected automatically If the air conditioning is not selected
318. uries especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel or pas senger air bag XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 42 AM Page 41 Safety features of your vehicle C040902AUN Noise and smoke When the air bags inflate they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle This is normal and is a result of the igni tion of the air bag inflator After the air bag inflates you may feel substantial dis comfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag as well as from breathing the smoke and powder Open your doors and or windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce dis comfort and prevent prolonged expo sure to the smoke and powder Though smoke and powder are non toxic it may cause Irritation to the skin eyes nose and throat etc If this is the case wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists 1JBH3051 C040903AEN Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger s seat Never place a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger s seat If the air bag deploys it would impact the rear fac ing child restraint Causing serious or fatal injury In addition do not place front facing child restraints in the front passenger s seat either If the front passenger air bag inflates it could cause serious or fatal injur
319. utton 4 SCAN Selection Button b 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button 6 CAT FOLDER Button 7 INFO Selection Button XM CAN ENG 4 102 audio qxp 4 14 2010 10 53 AM Page at Features of your vehicle Using SIRIUS Satellite Radio Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3 month complimentary period of SIRIUS Satellite Radio so you have access to over 130 channels of music information and entertainment programming Activation In order to extend or reactivate your sub scription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio you will need to contact SIRIUS Customer Care at 888 539 7474 Have your 12 digit SID Sirius Identification Number ESN Electronic Serial Number ready To retrieve the SID ESN turn on the radio press the SAT button and tune to chan nel zero Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on in Sirius mode and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activa tion signal 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button SIRIUS Satellite Radio Press the SAT button to switch to SIR IUS Satellite Radio It cycles through the different bands as noted below SAT 1 SAT2 SAT3 SAT 1 2 Channel Selection Button Press V SEEK A button for less than 0 8 seconds to select previous or next channel Press SEEK button for 0 8 seconds or longer to continuously move to previous or next channel If CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen channel up down i
320. vehi cle for any extended time with the engine running e When the engine stalls or fails to start excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system G270303AAM Operating precautions for catalytic converters if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device Therefore the following precautions must be observed e Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso line engines e Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction such as misfire or a noticeable loss of per formance Do not misuse or abuse the engine Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods 5 minutes or more Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control sys tem All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized KIA dealer Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle Additionally such actions could void your warranties XM CAN ENG 8 qxp 4 14 2010 11 02 AM Page 1 Dimensions 8 2 Bulb wattage 8 2 Tires and wheels 8 3 Recommended lubricants and capacities 8 4 Vehicl
321. ver the front door is opened the ENGINE START STOP button will illumi nate for your convenience The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed It will also go off immedi ately when the theft alarm system is armed F EQUIPPED ENGINE START STOP button position OFF Not illuminated e With automatic transaxle To turn off the engine START RUN posi tion or vehicle power ON position press the ENGINE START STOP button with the shift lever in the P Park posi tion When you press the ENGINE START STOP button without the shift lever in the P Park position the ENGINE START STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position A CAUTION You are able to turn off the engine START RUN or vehicle power ON only when the vehicle is not in motion In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC position by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds If the vehicle is still moving you can restart the engine without depress ing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button with the shift lever in the N Neutral position ft So ame ein XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 Driving your vehicle 12 00 PM Page 8 ACC Accessory Orange indicator e With automatic transaxle Press the ENGINE START STOP button while it is in th
322. veral times e To raise the seat cushion pull the lever up several times Front seat adjustment power if equipped The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the out side of the seat cushion Before driving adjust the seat to the proper position so you can easily control the steering wheel pedals and switches on the instrument panel So am SiS P XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 39 AM Page 6 Safety features of your vehicle A CAUTION e The power seat is driven by an electric motor Stop operating once the adjustment is complet ed Excessive operation may damage the electrical equipment When in operation the power seat consumes a large amount of electrical power To prevent unnecessary charging system drain don t adjust the power seat ar longer than necessary while the OXM039006 engine IS not running Forward and backward Seatback angle Do not operate two or more power Push the control switch forward or back Push the control switch forward or back seat control switches atthe same ward to move the seat to the desired ward to move the seatback to the desired time Doing so may result in position Release the switch once the angle Release the switch once the seat power seat motor or electrical Seat reaches the desired position reaches the desired position component malfunction OXM039007 XM CAN ENG 3 0 11726 2009 11 39 AM Page 7 P
323. when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km h 6 mph the seat belt warning light and chime will operate for approximately 11 times witha pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle speed decreases below 5 km h 3 mph C020102AAM EU Seat belt Driver s 3 point system with emergency locking retractor To fasten your seat belt To fasten your seat belt pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab 1 into the buckle 2 There will be an audible click when the tab locks into the buckle The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt por tion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips If you lean for ward in a slow easy motion the belt will extend and let you move around If there is a sudden stop or impact however the belt will lock into position It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly x NOTICE If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor firmly pull the belt out and release it Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly ae You can adjust the height of the shoulder XM CAN ENG 3 QXP 11 26 2009 11 41 AM Page 21 Safety features of your vehicle Front seat To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position To raise the height adjuster pull it up 1 To lower it push it down 3 while press
324. whenever you insert your ignition key into the igni tion switch and turn it to ON it checks and determines and verifies that the igni tion key is valid If the key is determined to be valid the engine will start If the key is determined to be invalid the engine will not start To activate the immobilizer system Turn the ignition key to the OFF position The immobilizer system activates auto matically Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle the engine will not start To deactivate the immobilizer sys tem Insert the ignition key into the key cylin der and turn it to the ON position x NOTICE When starting the engine do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts Keep each key separately in order to avoid a start ing malfunction A CAUTION Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may pre vent the engine from being started ee XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 37 AM Page 4 Features of your vehicle x NOTICE If you need additional keys or lose your keys consult an authorized KIA dealer J CAUTION The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobilizer system It is designed to give years of trouble free service however you should avoid expo sure to moisture static electricity and rou
325. will gradually slow down Release the switch at the speed you transaxle want to maintain e Shift into N Neutral with an automatic e Push the SET switch and release it transaxle immediately The cruising speed will e Push the CANCEL switch located on decrease by 2 0 km h 1 2 mph each the steering wheel time the SET switch is operated in Decrease the vehicle speed lower than this manner the memory speed by 20 km h 12 mph Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 40 km h 25 mph XM CAN ENG 11 26 2009 5 8 0 42 12 02 PM Page 42 P Driving your vehicle Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off but it will not turn the system off If you wish to resume cruise control operation push the RES switch located on your steer ing wheel You will return to your previ ously preset speed OXM059022N E090600AAM EU To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 40 km h 25 mph If any method other than the cruise ON OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated the most recent set speed will automati cally resume when the RES switch is pushed It will not resume however if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 40 km h 25 mph OXM059020N E090700AUN KM To turn cruise control off do one of the following e Push the cruise
326. x treatments used by some commer cial car washes If the blades are not wip ing properly clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent and rinse thoroughly with clean water CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper blades do not use gasoline kerosene paint thinner or other solvents on or near them G180200AUN Blade replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade quately the blades may be worn or cracked and require replacement A CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components do not attempt to move the wipers manual ly CAUTION The use of a non specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunc tion and failure XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 26 p Maintenance 4 1JBA7037 E aM e 1LDA5023 OHM078059 Front windshield wiper blade Type B Type A 1 Raise the wiper arm 1 Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic CAUTION locking clip Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield since it may N CAUTION chip or crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield since it may 1JBA7038 chip or crack the windshield 2 Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward 3 Lift it off the arm 4 Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal 7 26 XM CAN ENG 7 qxp 4 14 2010 10 58 AM Page 27 Ma
327. xtension pipe over the wrench han dle Go around the wheel tightening every nut following the numerical sequence shown in the image until they are all tight Then double check each nut for tightness After changing wheels have an authorized KIA dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible Wheel nut tightening torque 9 11 kg m 65 79 lb ft XM CAN ENG 6 QXP 11 26 2009 12 06 PM Page 13 What to do in an emergency If you have a tire gauge remove the valve cap and check the air pressure If the pressure is lower than recom mended drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the cor rect pressure If it is too high adjust it until it is correct Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting the tire pressure If the cap is not replaced dust and dirt may get into the tire valve and air may leak from the tire If you lose a valve cap buy another and install it as soon as possible After you have changed the wheels always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations N CAUTION Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled or if replaced that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used Installation of a non metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice versa will
328. y The gearshift lever must be returned to the neutral position before shifting into R Reverse The ring 1 located immediately below the shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the R posi tion if equipped Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R Reverse Never operate the engine with the tachometer rom in the red zone A CAUTION e When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth gear caution should be taken not to inadver tently press the gear shift lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is engaged Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red zone Such over revving of the engine may possi bly cause engine damage Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed 5 000 RPM or higher Such a downshifting may damage the engine P your foot resting on the clutch XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 01 PM Page 13 Driving your vehicle E050101AUN Using the clutch The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting then released slowly The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driv ing This can cause unnecessary wear Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline This causes unnec essary wear Use the foot br
329. y not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trail er load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 03 PM Page 64 Driving your vehicle Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Vehicle Vehicle i Vehicle s Capacity z Capacity Capacity A B C C C C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM an P A Vehicle Capacity 635 kg A Vehicle Capacity 635 kg A Vehicle Capacity 635 kg Weight 1400 Ibs Weight 1400 Ibs Weight 1400 Ibs e Subtract Occupant 426 k o Subtract Occupant 240 k 3 Subtract Occupant 49 Kg Weight 300 Ibs Weight 750 lbs Weight 860 Ibs 68 kg 150 Ibs x 2 68 kg 150 Ibs x 5 78 kg 172 Ibs x 5 Available Cargo and 499 kg Available Cargo and 295 kg Available Cargo and 245 kg Luggage weight 1100 lbs Luggage weight 650 Ibs Luggage weight 540 Ibs Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s Capacity weight XM CAN ENG 5 qxp 11 26 2009 12 03 PM Page 65 Driving your vehicle E150200AUN Certification label The certification label is located on the d
330. y 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion This light also comes on when the Supplemental Restraint System SRS is not working properly If the AIR BAG warning light does not come on or con tinuously remains on after operating for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition switch to the ON position or start ed the engine or if it comes on while driving have the SRS inspected by an authorized KIA dealer D150303AHM U1 Anti lock brake system 3 ABS warning light This warning light illuminates if the igni tion switch is turned ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally If the ABS warning light remains on comes on while driving or does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position this indicates that the ABS may have malfunctioned If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible The normal braking system will still be operational but without the assis tance of the anti lock brake system Electronic brake force distribution EBD system warning light 2 If these two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving the ABS and EBD system may have malfunctioned In this case your ABS and regular brake system may not work normally Have the vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible x NOTICE If the ABS warning light or EBD warn ing light i
331. you can After refueling make sure the fuel open it manually Remove the panel in cap is installed securely to pre the cargo area Pull the handle out slight vent fuel spillage in the event of ly an accident A CAUTION Do not pull the handle excessively otherwise the luggage compart ment area trim or release handle may be damaged So am Seis XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 40 AM Page 30 Features of your vehicle PANORAMIC SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED x NOTICE 5 NOTICE e In cold and wet climates the sunroof The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the may not work properly due to freez slide position but can be slid while in a ing conditions tilt position e After a vehicle is washed or in a rain storm be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it A CAUTION gt Do not continue to pull or push the OXM049027 sunroof control lever after the sun If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof roof is fully opened closed or tilted an you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the Damage to the motor or system sunroof control lever located on the over components could occur head console 1 The sunroof can only be opened closed or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 Features of your vehicle 10 40 AM Page 31 Sliding the sunroof Before opening or closing the sunroof
332. your vehicle to an authorized KIA dealer and have the system checked D150325AAM Cruise indicators if equipped CRUISE indicator CRUISE The indicator illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled The cruise indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON OFF switch on the steering wheel is pushed The indicator goes off when the cruise control ON OFF switch is pushed again For more information about the use of cruise control refer to Cruise control system in section 5 Cruise SET indicator SET The indicator illuminates when the cruise function switch SET or RES is ON The cruise SET indicator in the instru ment cluster is illuminated when the cruise control switch SET or RES is pushed The cruise SET indicator does not illumi nate when the cruise control switch CANCEL is pushed or the system is disengaged So am Ais XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 58 P Features of your vehicle D150327AUN Key reminder warning chime if equipped If the drivers door is opened while the ignition key is left in the ignition switch ACC or LOCK position the key reminder warning chime will sound This is to prevent you from locking your keys in the vehicle The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the driver s door is closed KEY OUT indicator if equipped KEY OUT When the ENGINE STA
333. zed KIA dealer XM CAN ENG 4 101 QXP 4 14 2010 10 41 AM Page 57 P Features of your vehicle D150323AAM EU ESC Electronic Stability Control indicator if equipped The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON but should go off after approximately 3 sec onds When the ESC is on it monitors the driving conditions and under normal driving conditions the ESC indicator will remain off When a slippery or low trac tion condition is encountered the ESC will operate and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is operating If this indicator illuminates and stays on the ESC may have malfunctioned Take your vehicle to an authorized KIA dealer and have the system checked ee D150324AAM EU ESC OFF indicator bs if equipped OFF The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON but should go off after approximately 3 seconds To switch to ESC OFF mode press the ESC OFF button The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated DBC Downhill brake con trol indicator if equipped P The DBC indicator will illuminate when the DBC button is pressed and the sys tem is on When driving down a steep hill at a speed under 35 km h 22 mph the DBC will operate and the DBC indicator will blink to indicate the DBC is operating If the red indicator illuminates the DBC system may have malfunctioned Take

2011 Sorento Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents